• My husband and I celebrated our fifth anniversary and my 40th birthday with a trip to Cancún.
• However, we didn't feel comfortable leaving our 4-year-old daughter at home, so we took her with us.
• We also brought my mother-in-law along to help us keep an eye on her, and we had an amazing time.

As the sun rose over the Caribbean Sea, I stepped out of my beachfront suite and settled into a lounge chair beside my private plunge pool, listening to the waves crash.

I snuggled up in my complimentary bathrobe and enjoyed my mandatory morning fuel — a coffee from the in-room Nespresso machine — taking in the calm of the first day of a weeklong vacation celebrating my 40th birthday and fifth wedding anniversary.

The views were serene. The atmosphere was peaceful. The company — to some — was unexpected. Next to me, wrapped in a similar bathrobe, sat my mother-in-law.

My husband and I wanted to take a trip to celebrate our anniversary, but didn't want to leave our daughter behind

Since having my 4-year-old daughter, traveling has taken a backseat to motherhood. In my 20s, I traveled as often as possible, from the gumless streets of Singapore to the iconic safaris of South Africa.

These days, my husband and I travel less often or choose to visit new countries with our toddler in tow. Although we're always glad to create these memories with her, we knew we wanted something different to celebrate my 40th birthday and our fifth anniversary.

Some people might have chosen to leave their kid at home so they could celebrate with a lavish party or intimate dinner for two. However, we didn't feel comfortable being away from our preschooler for a week in another country.

So, we brought her along and invited my mother-in-law with us to help keep an eye on our daughter and make sure we got some alone time.

The four of us headed on an all-inclusive vacation in Cancún, where we stayed in a two-bedroom enclave suite, complete with three beds, two bathrooms, and 1,570 square feet of shared, yet separate space.

Having that much room kept us from feeling crammed and confined, and with a living room in between the bedrooms, privacy was never an issue.

The arrangement granted us a nice mix of private and family time

We chose to stay at the Hilton Cancún Mar Caribe because it advertises itself as a family hotel. My husband and I spent days wading around the splash pool, rooftop pool, or plunge pool with our daughter.

We took advantage of the resort's dedicated kids areas and activities, including Beach Bunch — the kids' club complete with a playground, indoor playroom, and crafts. And at night, we attended the live shows.

Some days, we ate together at the family-friendly buffet, but on certain occasions, my husband and I dined "date-night-style" while our daughter and my mother-in-law had their own dinner or playdates back in the suite.

It was a great opportunity for them to enjoy quality time together while my husband and I celebrated our milestone anniversary.

My husband and I also relaxed together at the spa, delighting in a refreshing hydrotherapy session that included a sauna, steam room, cold plunge, hot tub, and sensory pool.

And even though my mother-in-law took care of our daughter and brought her to the kids' club, we made sure she had her own time alone at the spa as well.

Overall, we all had a great time together

During this trip, the old saying, "two's company, three's a crowd," came to mind.

And yes, there were times when it felt like we were staying at my husband's childhood home with his mother (or our daughter) occupying the space between us. Plus, some moments meant just for us became a group affair.

But then, we'd all look at the view of the beach while eating our in-room dining — that none of us had to prepare, on beds that none of us had to make, in rooms that none of us had to clean — and that feeling would dissipate.

Having my mother-in-law and kid on this trip was certainly unconventional, nontraditional, and maybe even downright weird to some. However, it granted us the opportunity to travel with some peace of mind.

• US forces started practicing conducting at-sea rescue missions with naval drones several years ago.
• These rehearsals were put to use earlier this month after Iran downed a US Apache helicopter.
• A US military official called the first-of-its-kind rescue mission a "significant step forward."

US forces began practicing using sea drones for water rescue missions years before an uncrewed vessel saved two soldiers after their Apache helicopter was shot down in the Middle East this month.

"You can rehearse medevac scenarios during exercises," a US military official told Business Insider, but to successfully execute that capability in a real emergency situation, "there's something to be said about that."

The official spoke on the condition of anonymity to share insight into the unusual early June rescue mission, during which a US Navy sea drone picked up two American crew members after Iran shot down their AH-64 Apache off the coast of Oman.

The rescue mission — an operational first for the US military — involved an uncrewed surface vessel, or USV, operated by Task Force 59, a Navy unit focused on integrating drones and artificial intelligence into naval operations in the Middle East.

When the Navy launched Task Force 59 in 2021, one of its goals was to test emerging technologies — particularly USVs, with which the US had less experience compared to some other drones — "to see how they could be optimized" for everyday naval operations, the military official said.

To do that, the US military worked closely with USV manufacturers during exercises with partners in the Middle East. One such drill, held a few years ago in the Gulf of Aqaba, south of Israel, tested the concept of using naval drones for medical evacuation. The simulation involved transporting a "patient" from a ship to the shore for follow-up treatment and care.

The military official said "the concept of using drones to support personnel transport — and, in particular, support medical evacuations — is something that was thought about very early on as these systems were integrated into regional operations by the US."

A 'significant step forward'

President Donald Trump said on June 9 that Iran had shot down an Apache helicopter while it was patrolling over the Strait of Hormuz. The US military said the two American crew members were rescued off the coast of Oman within roughly two hours.

The US knew the Apache crew's location and had established contact with the soldiers while looking for an opportunity to rescue them using assets from across the military, the official said.

Among the assets available were tactical aircraft and a Corsair USV, a 24-foot-long surface drone made by Texas-based Saronic Technologies. The official said this vessel, while just one platform in a broader effort, played an "integral role" in the search-and-rescue mission.

When the vessel arrived, the Apache crew members were able to hoist themselves into the USV, which had the capability and proximity to move the crew from one location on the water to another — a necessary switch because of "operational circumstances," the official said, declining to elaborate.

Once they were moved to the second location, the soldiers could then be "feasibly" lifted by helicopter to be transferred ashore for additional treatment, the official added.

The maritime rescue mission comes amid a broader push by Washington and its allies to integrate drones into naval operations. Ukraine's use of USVs against the Russian Navy in the Black Sea has given these efforts greater urgency.

Beyond the Middle East, where US forces have primarily used uncrewed surface vessels for intelligence, surveillance, and reconnaissance missions, the Navy has also been expanding its naval drone training and operations in Europe in recent years.

The military official said the Apache rescue is a "clear demonstration" of the value of integrating USVs into everyday naval operations and marks a "significant step forward" for the US in expanding its surface drone mission portfolio.

While the Apache rescue mission was out of the ordinary, casualty evacuations using drones aren't a new concept. Ukraine regularly uses uncrewed ground robots, or UGVs, to rescue wounded soldiers from the battlefield.

Warfare is becoming increasingly autonomous, and there are indications that missions like these could become more common as time goes on. Western militaries are taking note. Last December, for instance, NATO hosted an event in London to source industry solutions for battlefield treatment and evacuation in drone-saturated environments.

• This post originally appeared in the Business Insider Today newsletter.
• You can sign up for Business Insider's daily newsletter here.

Learn AI so I can eventually go away.

That's the mindset for many Gen Xers and Baby Boomers who are learning AI to hang onto their jobs long enough to retire. BI's Amanda Hoover spoke to elder Americans about how they're getting a crash course in AI as they race toward retirement.

While younger Americans worry about their job prospects for the next few decades, older Americans are on much shorter timelines. Many just need to work for a little bit longer before calling it quits.

They're also uniquely positioned for the AI boom in the short term. Years of workplace experience mean they are a treasure trove of knowledge that could benefit the AI tools that need training.

And unlike their younger colleagues, they're less inclined to worry about automating themselves out of a job. After all, they want to be out of a job in a few years if they can afford it.

Not everyone's so enthusiastic about adopting AI. Amanda spoke to a 47-year-old working in legal sales who has moral qualms about the tech's environmental footprint. But she's also realistic about trying to future-proof herself until she can retire in a few years.

"Most people in corporate are just trying to make it to a point where they are fine financially," she said. "You just don't know when your ticket is punched."

Kymm Dracup knows what it feels like to get her ticket punched.

She was unemployed for 22 months before nabbing a temporary consulting job a few months ago. But with no guarantees of future full-time work, she's on edge. She outlined her challenges to BI's Tess Martinelli as part of a new BI series, Still in the Game, about older Americans still looking for work.

At 56 years old, she says being older has impacted her confidence when searching for jobs. She also thinks her age is affecting her job search, although she acknowledges that it's difficult to prove.

She was evicted from her home and moved in with her daughter, joining the many Americans who have opted for a multigenerational household to address financial pressures.

Dracup's story shows why so many older Americans feel they can't afford to fall behind on AI. Longer lifespans, vanishing pensions, and rising healthcare costs mean retirement has gotten more expensive, and the margin for error is thin.

• Lisa Desai moved her family of eight from Florida to Barbados.
• The mom said the kids have more freedom and independence living on the island.
• There are some cons, she added, but they are far outweighed by the pros.

This story is based on an interview with Lisa Desai, 46, founder and CEO of a facility management corporation that operates remotely in her adopted country, Barbados. It has been edited for length and clarity.

Our twins were approaching 14 when my husband, Ebrahim, 59, and I decided to move them and our four younger kids from Hutchinson Island North, Florida, to Barbados.

We were looking for an adventure before they hit 16 and took on responsibilities like getting a driver's license.

Ebrahim and I could run our facility management corporation, The Harmil Group, remotely, and we wanted a drastic change of scene.

We considered Thailand but were put off by the time difference, as we operate in Canada and the US and would be juggling separate schedules.

Greece and Italy seemed like slightly better options, but moving there involved a lot of bureaucracy.

Someone suggested Barbados

Then someone suggested to us, "Hey, why don't you try Barbados?" There was a $3,000 "welcome stamp" program for people who didn't work for a Barbados company and could show they had a certain amount of money in the bank.

It made perfect sense to us because it had super-reliable WiFi and an international airport from which you could fly directly to world cities like New York City and London.

We rented out our homes in Ottawa and Florida and arrived in Barbados on April 19, 2025. It was one of the best decisions of our lives.

I've homeschooled all six kids — now between 5 and 15 — since 2019, and there's a great homeschooling community here. We usually start at 7 a.m. and finish at 1 p.m.

Islanders are polite and friendly

Then we'll do something fun like go to the beach, go sailing, and play golf or tennis. The children are very independent, and we give them freedom to be themselves. Life in Barbados is the adventure we craved.

I don't think they'll fully appreciate it until they're adults, but the exposure to a new culture is very helpful.

Bajans are very friendly, polite, and open-minded. The kids are happy to chat with strangers and don't shy away from them.

Another advantage is the great healthcare system. It's inexpensive, and you get same-day or next-day service.

As for cons, the food can be expensive, and Amazon deliveries take between one and three weeks. If you want to buy something like a rashguard, you might visit five stores before finding the right size.

Transportation is a bit scary for me because it's the other side of the road, and the highways need maintenance. Infrastructure is in progress.

Everyone drives like they're in little go-karts. But you learn to go with the flow. You also need to adapt to island time, when a visit by a plumber arranged for 9 a.m. means sometime that day.

The kids' childhood is unusual

We visited Canada, where Ebrahim and I were raised, in the fall of last year, and it was nice to get some North American vibes. The kids spoke to their friends and family and came away thinking their childhood wasn't the norm.

We still have wanderlust, and our next journey may take us to Europe, but we'll always treasure our stay in Barbados.

• Polls in June estimated Trump's approval rating at between 30% and 37%.
• Gallup tracked presidential approval ratings for nearly 90 years until earlier this year.
• Bill Clinton had the highest approval ratings when he left the Oval Office.

For nearly 90 years, the Gallup presidential approval polls measured Americans' public opinion on the president's job performance, but now, they're a thing of the past.

In February, Gallup, the analytics and polling company that pioneered presidential approval ratings, confirmed they were ending the practice, which, since the 1930s, had asked Americans: "Do you approve or disapprove of the way [the current president] is handling his job as president?"

The company cited a "shift in corporate strategy" as the driving force behind the decision, The New York Times reported. Instead, Gallup will "focus more on issues and policy polling."

In Gallup's most recent poll, conducted in early December 2025, 36% of respondents said they approved of Trump's performance, down from 47% in early 2025 after he took office for the second time.

In the poll, 59% of respondents said they disapproved of his handling of the presidency, slightly down from 60% in late November 2025.

While the Gallup polls may no longer be conducted, other polling firms continue to release approval-rating polls.

The American Research Group, a New Hampshire-based pollster, asked the exact same question as Gallup and found that 30% of respondents approved of Trump's job performance in mid-June, while 66% disapproved. It also found that 70% of respondents disapproved of the president's handling of the economy, a defining issue during the 2024 election.

A larger poll conducted by the Associated Press and NORC Center for Public Affairs Research in mid-June put his approval rating at 37%, while 62% disapproved.

During his first term, Trump was the first president since Gallup began tracking presidential approval in the 1930s to never have a job approval rating above 50%.

The American Presidency Project at the University of California, Santa Barbara, compiled the final Gallup ratings for each presidential term over the past 70 years — from Harry Truman to Joe Biden — and indicated how popular each leader was when they left the Oval Office.

See how the last 13 US presidents ranked in their end-of-term polling, from the lowest to the highest final approval ratings.

Richard Nixon

Final approval rating: 24%

While Richard Nixon won the 1972 election in a historic landslide, the end of his presidency was tainted by the Watergate scandal that led him to resign on August 9, 1974, when facing the threat of impeachment and removal.

Surveyed between August 2 and 5, 1974, after the House Judiciary Committee had passed articles of impeachment against the president, but before Nixon resigned, 66% of respondents to the Gallup poll said they disapproved of Nixon's presidency — the highest disapproval rate of any president on the list.

Harry S. Truman

Final approval rating: 32%

Assuming the presidency after Franklin D. Roosevelt's death, Harry Truman served two terms that covered the aftermath of World War II and the beginning of the Cold War, including the Korean War, which was widely unpopular and contributed to his low approval rating by the end of his second term in 1953.

When asked December 11 to 16, 1952, 56% of poll respondents said they disapproved of his handling of the presidency during his term.

Jimmy Carter

Final approval rating: 34%

Jimmy Carter had high approval ratings — and a disapproval rating in the single digits — during the early days of his term, but his handling of international affairs, such as the Iran hostage crisis in 1979, along with a struggling economy, ultimately made him widely unpopular by the end of his term.

He lost the 1980 presidential election to Ronald Reagan and faced a disapproval rating of 55% in polling conducted December 5 to 8, when he was readying to leave the White House.

George W. Bush

Final approval rating: 34%

Despite uniting the nation in the wake of the 9/11 attacks, George W. Bush saw his public approval fade during his second term. His approval rating spiked after the 2001 terrorist attacks, the beginning of the Iraq War in 2003, and the capture of Saddam Hussein.

After his reelection, his popularity began to decline as the Iraq War extended. His handling of Hurricane Katrina in 2005 and the onset of the 2008 financial crisis also contributed to his low approval ratings.

From January 9 to 11, 2009, as Bush prepared to hand over the presidency to Barack Obama, 61% of poll respondents said they disapproved of his handling of the presidency during his second term.

Donald Trump

Final approval rating: 34%

Donald Trump's first presidency was divisive from the start, as he entered the White House with an approval rating below 50%. He's the first president in modern history to never exceed 50% approval on the Gallup polls during his entire presidency.

While his approval ratings dwindled over the course of his four years in office, his handling of the COVID-19 pandemic in particular came under scrutiny ahead of his loss in the 2020 election.

His lowest approval rating in office came during his final Gallup poll, conducted January 4 to 15, 2021.

Most of that polling period took place immediately after the Capitol insurrection on January 6, and Trump faced a disapproval rating of 62%, the second-worst only after Richard Nixon's at the time he left office.

Joe Biden

Final approval rating: 40%

While Joe Biden saw approval ratings above 50% during his first six months in office, rising inflation, illegal immigration, and the wars in Ukraine and Gaza contributed to a decline in his approval ratings.

His lowest-ranking Gallup poll, in which 36% of respondents said they approved of his handling of the role, came in July 2024, a month after his debate performance against Trump shifted focus toward his age and fitness for office.

As he left office, in polls collected January 2 to 16, 2025, Biden received a disapproval rating of 54%.

Lyndon B. Johnson

Final approval rating: 49%

After assuming the presidency because of John F. Kennedy's assassination, Lyndon B. Johnson won the 1964 election in a historic landslide, but he faced decreasing approval ratings over his handling of the Vietnam War.

Low approval ratings, along with a divided party, led Johnson to withdraw from the 1968 presidential race.

At the time of his withdrawal, only 36% of poll respondents said they approved of his handling of the presidency.

By the time he left the office, however, his approval rating had risen to 49%. In polling conducted January 1 to 6, 1969, 37% of respondents said they disapproved of his handling of the role, and 14% said they had no opinion, one of the higher percentages among the listed presidents.

Gerald Ford

Final approval rating: 53%

Assuming the presidency upon Nixon's resignation, Gerald Ford served as US president from August 1974 until January 1977, after losing the election to Jimmy Carter.

During his presidency, Ford faced mixed reviews, with his approval dropping after he pardoned Nixon and introduced conditional amnesty for draft dodgers in September 1974.

Polled December 10 to 13, 1976, after he had lost the reelection to Jimmy Carter, 32% of respondents said they disapproved of Ford's handling of the presidency, and 15% said they had no opinion on it, the highest percentage of the listed presidents.

George H. W. Bush

Final approval rating: 56%

Though the elder Bush lost his reelection bid in the 1992 presidential election against Bill Clinton, the public opinion of him was generally positive by the end of his term.

In the weeks before his 1992 nomination as the Republican presidential candidate, however, George H. W. Bush had only a 29% approval rating, the lowest of his presidency. A recession and a reversal of his tax policy contributed to his drop in popularity.

In polling conducted January 8 to 11, 1993, 37% of respondents said they disapproved of his handling of the presidency, while 56% said they approved.

Barack Obama

Final approval rating: 59%

Since the beginning of his presidency in 2009, Barack Obama had a high approval rating for a modern-day president; he averaged nearly 47% approval over eight years.

At his lowest point, in polling conducted September 8 to 11, 2011, 37% of poll respondents said they approved of his presidency, a decline most likely influenced by the president's healthcare policies and his handling of the 2008 economic crisis and the subsequent rise in unemployment rates.

In polls conducted January 17 to 19, 2017, when Obama was leaving office, 37% of respondents said they disapproved of his handling of the role, with 59% saying they approved.

Dwight D. Eisenhower

Final approval rating: 59%

After winning the 1952 election in a landslide, Dwight D. Eisenhower saw high approval ratings throughout his presidency, never dropping below the disapproval rating.

Holding office during the critical Cold War years, Eisenhower saw his approval remain positive through the end of his second term, with only 28% of respondents polled December 8 to 13, 1960, saying they disapproved of his handling of the presidency, the lowest among the presidents listed.

Ronald Reagan

Final approval rating: 63%

Ronald Reagan's strong leadership toward ending the Cold War and implementing his economic policies contributed to consistently positive ratings during his presidency and the subsequent election of his vice president, George H. W. Bush, as his successor to the presidency.

By the time he left office, 29% of respondents in a Gallup poll conducted December 27 to 29, 1988, said they disapproved of his handling of the presidency.

Bill Clinton

Final approval rating: 66%

After winning the 1992 elections against the incumbent George H. W. Bush, Bill Clinton saw high approval ratings throughout his presidency, though he faced mixed opinions at times during his first term because of his domestic agenda, including tax policy and social issues.

Despite being impeached in 1998 by the House of Representatives over his testimony describing the nature of his relationship with Monica Lewinsky, Clinton continued to see positive approval ratings throughout his second term.

By the time he left the White House, he had an approval rating of 66%, the highest of all the presidents on this list.

In the poll conducted January 10 to 14, 2001, only 29% of respondents said they disapproved of his handling of the presidency.

• Elon Musk is too rich for the rich list.
• The Tesla and SpaceX CEO, worth $1.1 trillion, is wealthier than the next four richest people combined.
• Musk lost more than Warren Buffett's entire net worth on Monday.

Elon Musk is now so wealthy that he's making a mockery of the rich list.

The Tesla and SpaceX CEO was worth $1.08 trillion as of Monday's market close, per the Bloomberg Billionaires Index. The next-richest person in the world, Alphabet cofounder Larry Page, was less than a third as wealthy with a net worth of $299 billion.

In fact, Musk is richer than the next four people in the billionaire rankings: Page, his cofounder Sergey Brin, Amazon founder Jeff Bezos, and Oracle cofounder Larry Ellison, who were together worth $1.06 trillion as of Monday's close.

The sheer scale of Musk's fortune means shifts in others' fortunes now pale in comparison. For example, Page, Brin, and Bezos each lost more than $10 billion in Monday's tech rout.

Those losses look paltry compared to Musk's $152 billion wealth decline on the same day, fueled by a 16% plunge in SpaceX's stock just days after its blockbuster IPO.

Put differently, Musk lost in one day a sum that exceeds Warren Buffett's entire fortune. The 95-year-old investor and Berkshire Hathaway chairman ranked 10th on Bloomberg's list with a $146 billion net worth at Monday's close.

Given Musk has a $700 billion-plus lead over anyone else, he simply looks out of place on a mere billionaires list. He's started a trillionaire club with only one member.

The wealth gap between Musk and his rich-list peers has only grown truly stark in the past few months. In fact, Ellison briefly leapfrogged him in September to become the world's richest person despite being worth less than $400 billion.

The key reason for Musk's net worth skyrocketing has been SpaceX's soaring valuation, which has boosted his fortune by $456 billion in less than six months, per Bloomberg's list.

That wealth gain has catapulted Musk into a league of his own and given him a seemingly insurmountable lead over the rest of the billionaire pack.

The yawning divide reflects Musk's large stakes in two companies valued at over $1 trillion: Tesla and SpaceX. It's hard to see anyone catching up to him, barring a massive crash in either company's stock price, given nobody else has two horses of that size in the wealth race.

• Lauren Sánchez Bezos is a former news anchor, the wife of Jeff Bezos, and a rising fashion figure.
• Though her style has always had a daring edge, it's notably evolved over the years.
• She's become a fan of vibrant colors, designer pieces, and statement gowns.

News anchor, helicopter pilot, actor, and mother can all describe Lauren Sánchez Bezos. You could also call her a rising fashion star.

The 56-year-old New Mexico native has been wearing bold looks on red carpets since the start of her career. Recently, though, especially while making her relationship with Jeff Bezos public, her style has leveled up.

Here's a look at her fashion evolution, from simple outfits accessorized with Hermès bags to see-through pieces at White House events.

Lauren Sánchez Bezos kept her outfits simple at the start of her career.

She regularly wore trendy two-piece outfits in the early 2000s and an assortment of minidresses — like the brown knit piece she sported at the 2002 Environmental Media Awards.

Sánchez Bezos also had a signature pair of shoes at that point in her career: PVC sandals with light-brown soles and thin, see-through heels.

But she wasn't afraid to experiment with daring styles.

At the 2004 Shalom Foundation Gala, Sánchez Bezos donned a deep-gray gown that hugged her body at the bodice and reached the floor with its long skirt.

It was also practically strapless, with only a single spaghetti-thin strap across one shoulder. The piece connected to more strings across its open back, which held the dress up and created a daring detail.

Sánchez Bezos completed the outfit with crystal earrings and a silver statement watch.

Her accessories were always chic, even in the early 2000s.

While attending a High Flying fundraiser in 2008, Sánchez Bezos opted for trendy styles at the time: a high-neck, short-sleeve blouse tucked into a black-and-white circle skirt, knee-high boots over semi-sheer tights, and a leather belt.

But her purse was timeless. She carried a solid black Hermès Birkin bag with what appeared to be palladium hardware.

She started to look like a Hollywood star around 2010.

She attended Vanity Fair's Oscars after-party that year in a shimmering gown that was fit for an award winner.

The dress was sleeveless, form-fitting, and covered from top to bottom in silver sparkles. It also had a tan lining that gave the dress a nude illusion and a deep V-neckline.

She began introducing vibrant colors to her wardrobe around the same time.

At the 2012 Vanity Fair Oscars after-party, Sánchez Bezos sported a strapless, understated gown. It had a fitted bodice, a straight skirt, and solid fabric.

But its bright red shade stood out on the carpet, making for a memorable look. The color has become one of Sánchez Bezos' go-to shades in recent years.

She completed the look with platform sandals and diamond jewelry.

For her first red-carpet appearance with Jeff Bezos, Sánchez Bezos showed up in style.

She wore a black-and-red dress that was as daring as it was glamorous. It featured long sleeves made from dotted mesh, a plunging neckline that reached her navel, and a thigh-high slit that showed her platform sandals.

The piece also had a geometric print crafted from sequins that shimmered in the light.

And even when they began coordinating their outfits, Sánchez Bezos' daring aesthetic still stood out.

The couple attended the 2023 Vanity Fair Oscars after-party in matching black outfits. While Bezos sported a classic suit, Sánchez Bezos wore a bold Elie Saab gown.

The dress had a corseted bodice with off-the-shoulder sleeves, black sparkles arranged in stripes, and a see-through skirt that revealed her legs.

In recent years, color has remained a staple of Sánchez Bezos' outfits.

At the 2023 Kering Caring for Women dinner, for example, Sánchez Bezos sported a neon-yellow gown from Dolce & Gabbana.

The halter dress hugged her body, reached the floor, and didn't need any accessories. It sparkled entirely on its own.

So have see-through dresses, even while visiting the White House.

Sánchez Bezos and Bezos attended a 2024 state dinner hosted by Joe Biden in honor of then-Japanese Prime Minister Fumio Kishida.

Though the couple's presence was notable on its own, Sánchez Bezos' outfit caught even more attention.

She wore an off-the-shoulder gown crafted from red satin and lace. Its corseted bodice was semi-sheer with a low neckline, and its skirt was tightly wrapped around her legs.

Sánchez Bezos wore it with gold-leaf sandals and diamond earrings.

Sánchez Bezos had a high-profile fashion moment at the 2024 Met Gala.

She stunned in an Oscar de la Renta gown. It featured a strapless black bodice with a sweetheart neckline and a full skirt decorated with reflective pieces shaped like roses.

It was even rumored that Anna Wintour had a hand in the outfit choice.

She then took on the style of a businesswoman to promote her children's book.

At the Forbes Power Women's Summit in September 2024, Sánchez Bezos talked about the start of her career, writing her first children's book, and being engaged to Bezos.

For the occasion, she sported an all-white outfit with long trousers, a blazer that revealed her lace bralette, and platform heels.

Recycling outfits has become a regular practice for the former journalist.

After wearing her McQueen suit to the Forbes panel in September and a New York Times book event in December, she donned it again at Donald Trump's inauguration.

This time around, however, she paired it with another daring piece: a Schiaparelli coat made from brushed wool, mohair, and gold-brass buttons designed to look like nipples.

The Italian piece retailed for 8,700 euros, or about $9,982.

She entered her bridal era in March 2025.

While the Amazon founder wore a black suit with a white undershirt, a matching bow tie, and a diamond brooch, Sánchez Bezos donned a strapless white Oscar de la Renta ball gown.

It had a feather fringe, a mermaid silhouette, and was accessorized with an emerald necklace.

The couple married a few months later in June 2025.

Her style has taken an elegant turn in 2026.

For the 2026 Met Gala, Sánchez Bezos wore a Schiaparelli gown crafted from navy blue satin.

It had a V-shaped neckline, a short train, and crystal straps — one of which hung off her shoulder.

The dress, inspired by the 1884 painting "Madame X," doubled as a hidden message to those who have criticized her daring fashion choices.

Still, Sánchez Bezos hasn't abandoned her core style.

In June, the author was photographed wearing an outfit that blended casual and high-end styles.

She wore a blue knit dress lined with silver shimmering mesh at the hem and neckline.

To complement the latter details, she added a metallic clutch, diamond earrings, and tan Louboutin heels.

• I promised my sons a trip to the World Cup. Sixteen years later, I couldn't afford to make it happen.
• After I wrote about breaking that promise, a stranger offered to fly all three of us to the match.
• I was so sure it was a scam that I reported it to the FBI.

For sixteen years, the same photo has been my Facebook cover. It's me and my twin boys, Charlie and Thomas, then 3, in matching Australia jerseys, taken before I flew to the 2010 World Cup. I crouched beside them shortly after my marriage ended and promised that when they were older, I'd take them to a World Cup of their own. They were too young to understand, but I meant it.

We talked about it for years, always aiming for 2026. But when I priced the trip, it stopped being a holiday and became a house payment. I sat them down, showed them the cost, and asked if they still wanted it. They said no and meant it. I was the one who couldn't let go of the dream.

So I wrote about it. Then, everything changed.

A stranger sent me a message

A few days after the article ran, a man named Avi messaged me on LinkedIn. His profile had no photo and 21 followers, and I almost ignored it. He'd read the piece and asked if it was true. When I said it was, he offered to fly the three of us from Australia to Seattle to watch Australia play the US, and to cover the flights, accommodation, and tickets.

I thought there had to be a catch, so I searched his name. Google revealed him to be a business founder, which was enough to give me hope. I sent him photos of our passports.

My family told me I'd been scammed

Then the messages stopped, and my excitement turned into dread. I had sent copies of my children's passports to a random stranger. I pasted the messages into ChatGPT, which stated there was a 100% chance it was a scam. I called my bank, the passport office, and the police. I even emailed the FBI, who surely had better things to do.

My wife said what I already knew. Nobody would offer a free trip to a stranger. "You're stupid," she told me. I had to agree.

Even so, a small part of me thought there was a 1% chance it was real. For the next eight hours, I swung between the certainty I'd been played and the small hope I hadn't.

I couldn't believe my eyes

Avi messaged back. I told him I wanted to FaceTime, sure this would be the moment of truth. He called. Avi told me he was a father too and knew what my promise meant. He wanted to do something good with no strings attached.

Soon after, he messaged to say the airfares were booked. I typed in the confirmation number on the United website, expecting nothing. Three confirmed seats appeared on the screen, under my name and the boys'. It was past midnight, which made it my birthday. I just sat there staring at the screen.

In the morning, the match tickets were transferred to my FIFA account. When they hit my account, I told the boys we were flying to the US in two days. They reacted the way I had, certain it was too good to be true.

When it came time to pack, the only things they put in their bags were soccer jerseys. Even heading to the airport, I was unsure if this was still happening. It was only when the cabin doors closed that I let myself believe it. We were crossing the Pacific and back for four days, all for a single match.

In Seattle, my boys led the chants

We made every hour in Seattle about the tournament, because I wanted my sons to feel what I felt in South Africa in 2010. We visited fan sites and watched every match.

On the morning of the game, we crammed into Victory Hall with thousands of other Australians. I had a beer in my hand at 7 a.m. because I'm an Aussie and it was a match day. Grown men in green and gold, belting out songs, drinking beer out of their shoes, drums banging. My boys had never seen anything like it.

From there, the streets turned into a moving crowd. Singing, chanting, people spilling toward the stadium in waves. Charlie was on crutches, weeks after knee surgery, refusing to slow down. His brother stayed beside him the whole way, leading the chants.

It usually takes an act of God to get a teenager to show that kind of joy in public. Both of mine were grinning the entire way. Walking into the stadium with my arms around both of them felt unreal. For a moment, the three of us just stood there. I thought about the photo from 2010, and how long I'd waited to take another one. Then we took it, the same three faces, same positions, and the same grins. Except I was now the shortest one.

I sent the photo to Avi, who replied: "I'm just so glad I had the balls to do it."

Seventy-two hours earlier, Avi was a stranger with no photo and 21 followers. A man I had never met had spent thousands of dollars so two teenagers he would never meet could be happy. I made a promise to two 3-year-olds who had no idea what I was saying. Sixteen years later, a stranger made it happen in three days.

Now I can change that Facebook photo.

• Ukraine's drone operators aren't necessarily more protected than other soldiers on the battlefield.
• Saying "they are doing their job in much safer conditions is completely wrong," an official said.
• They're top targets, and a soldier said pilots sometimes need to fight just like infantry.

Ukraine's drone operators aren't necessarily spared from the horrors of war because they pilot remote systems, a senior official said. Many are in the fighting, and they're often top targets for the enemy.

Taras Berezovets, head of the military cooperation department of Ukraine's Territorial Defense Forces, a part of Ukraine's armed forces, said that with drone operators, "they do just the same job" as other soldiers. "To say that they are doing their job in much safer conditions is completely wrong."

"We should never forget that drone operators are the primary targets for Russian units," he added, speaking at a recent drone summit in Latvia. "They are trying to kill them," he said, just as Ukraine is trying to do to Russian drone pilots.

"Drone operators are first of all soldiers, and they are subject to the same psychological problems and traumas" as any other soldier, Berezovets said, explaining that he would never consider operators differently.

Dmytro "Liber" Zhluktenko, a former drone operator who is now a lessons-learned analyst with Ukraine's 413th Unmanned Systems Regiment "RAID," told Business Insider that operators don't feel they are in any less danger because they have a remote-controlled weapon. "It's not like that," he said, rejecting the idea that the role is safer. "It's very dangerous."

"In some of the cases, we have our drone operators engage in small arms combat like infantry," he said, "So it's basically infantry with the drones." It means getting close to a fight, as soldiers with other weapons do.

Drones are a crucial weapon for both Ukraine and Russia in this war, filling shortages of both weapons and manpower. Ukraine says that drones are now causing 90% of Russia's front-line losses as usage expands.

Drone operators are also force multipliers. One pilot can launch countless drones over a deployment to scout and gather intelligence on enemy movements and targets or to launch cheap attacks on soldiers and weapon systems, including expensive gear.

That makes them priority targets.

The operators that control Ukraine's spy and strike drones often have to get close to the front lines to preserve the connection with their drones and to work effectively with regular infantry. It means they have to move, hide, and survive just like other soldiers.

Soldiers and drone operators have told Business Insider that Russia treats drone pilots as high-value targets because of the damage they can do on the battlefield. They said Russian forces have intensified attacks with missiles, bombs, and other weapons to hunt those operators, while Western analysts have noted rising casualties among Ukraine's drone pilots.

One drone operator, who spoke to Business Insider on the condition of anonymity to discuss sensitive military issues, said "when the enemy spots a drone operator somewhere, it uses every single thing at its disposal — every type of weaponry" — to eliminate them. And Ukraine is targeting Russian pilots, too.

Ukraine is working to develop solutions to protect its drone operators by keeping them farther from the fighting to decrease the risk. For instance, there is new remote-control technology that allows interceptor drone pilots to control their drones from hundreds of miles away from the launch point. But many drone types still require operators staying much closer.

Zhluktenko said that Ukraine wants to have fewer people at risk on the battlefield, but that's not always possible.

Sometimes they move operators farther back for their safety, "even if it comes at the expense of our capabilities, because these are our people and we value them so much." He described it as "a very tough balance."

"We want to keep them extremely safe, but at the same time, there is some work to be done," he said.

Ukraine is heavily pushing autonomy so drones and robots can operate with less human control, keeping soldiers farther from the fight. It's part of a broader effort to move troops out of the most dangerous areas, including by scaling ground robots that could eventually handle front-line logistics.

Mykyta Rozhkov, chief business development officer at Ukrainian drone and weapons maker Frontline Robotics, told Business Insider that "the general trend is to get the pilots as far as possible" from the front line, with the absolute bare minimum of soldiers used in dangerous areas when drones and robots can't handle it alone.

But, for now, drone operators and other soldiers remain at risk.

"Russians are right now prioritizing hitting not the assault troops or soldiers;" instead, they are aiming at drone and ground robot operators, he said.

Western militaries watching the war are also aware of how at-risk drone pilots can be. The US Army course designed to catch the force up on drone warfare is teaching soldiers what it feels like to be hunted.

Maj. Rachel Martin, the course director, previously told Business Insider that the instructors deliberately use drones against students to help them understand "what it's like to be hunted by another operator from an adversary force: what it sounds like, what it feels like, how often they need to displace in order to survive or not be observed."

That matters because "the minute you're observed, you need to move," she said. "What follows that is usually fires of some capacity," such as artillery.

She said that the goal is to simulate an enemy force actively searching for them and to test their reactions "so they get used to one being hunted by the enemy." The US is used to having control of the air in its conflicts, where anything in the air above them is likely friendly, but that may not be the case in future fights.

Berezovets said Western militaries should study Ukraine's experience, including how heavily Russia targets drone units and command centers. He said Ukraine has to keep moving them because "this war, especially in terms of the drone war, is like a cat-and-mouse game. The Russians are always searching for the locations of our drone units."

He said allies ought to consider building drone command centers "deeper underground," like Ukraine does when it can, even though it's expensive work. He said that "they should be as deep as possible."

• I have my own child, but having other people's kids in my home has always been overstimulating.
• When other children are in my home, I feel anxious and responsible for their safety.
• As a neurodivergent family, having other kids over can feel overwhelming.

With all the ongoing rhetoric surrounding where kids do and don't belong, it feels a bit uncomfortable to admit that I don't like having other people's children in my home. Most kids are small, noisy chaos agents that leave a mess in their wake, mine included. And since I already have one wreaking havoc on my home regularly, adding more can feel overwhelming.

Prior to becoming a mom, I spent years working with children. While there were parts of it that I enjoyed, it was also overstimulating, and I was relieved to come home and have kid-free time. Beyond the noise and energy levels, it also felt like a huge responsibility to care for other people's children and look after their safety and well-being.

Having other children in my home makes me anxious

The toddler years, when I was worrying that my daughter might choke on a too-small toy or too-large grape, are now behind me. But when younger children come into my home, those worries crop up again. Especially because my daughter now has an extensive collection of Legos and other toys with tiny pieces that are annoying, but not potentially dangerous, most of the time.

It's unnerving going through her things to determine what needs to be hidden away. In the past, I've ended up having to leap across the room when something I missed ends up grasped in a toddler's fist. The responsibility for supervising the other kids always seems to be dumped on me as well, even when other parents are present. And since it is my home, I also feel responsible for making sure everyone stays safe and leaves uninjured.

For my neurodivergent family, home is our safe space

In a lot of ways, our house is my family's safe space. As a neurodivergent individual who also has an autistic child, we have our house set up for her sensory and other needs. On the rare occasions that we have other children over, there is a scramble to relocate all the items that aren't age-appropriate or could lead to chaos when used by multiple children, such as her trampoline or sensory toys. And my daughter is very attached to her belongings, so we also have to be careful to put away anything that could get broken and damaged.

Moving and returning items to their places can be exhausting for me and overwhelming for my daughter. So is trying to clean and tidy our home for children who seem to find everything — from eating the goldfish they find under the coffee table to using a bill from the doctor's office as a coloring page.

Clearing up my doom piles around the house often just results in them being relocated to my bedroom, where I can close the door. And then there's the cleanup afterward — when the sandbox ends up getting tracked all over the first floor, and there is a collection of rejected food under the dining room table.

It's all why I try to limit gatherings with kids at our house. While I don't mind going to other people's homes, the ideal situation for me is to meet at a neutral location, like a park or museum. That way, I don't feel responsible for supervising someone else's children, and no one has to worry about cleanup before or after.

• Oracle laid off staff in March. A new filing shows its global head count fell by 21,000 over the last year.
• Costs associated with restructuring increased by $1.5 billion over the past year, up 391%.
• Oracle has been ramping up data spending during the AI boom.

Oracle's head count has been shrinking as it made layoffs to cut costs — and now there's a number behind its reduction.

A filing published Monday showed that its global workforce declined by 21,000 between May 2025 and May 2026. The number includes both attrition and layoffs.

Oracle employed around 141,000 employees worldwide as of May 31, 2026, the filing said.

Compared with the numbers reported in its 2025 filing, the company shed 9,000 jobs in the US and 12,000 jobs internationally.

Restructuring and other expenses — which consist of costs for employee severance, contract termination, and other exit activity — increased by 391% from $374 million to about $1.8 billion over the last year, Oracle said in the filing.

Oracle did not respond to a request for comment.

In March, the company began laying off staff but did not confirm the scale of the cuts.

The notification email sent to the laid-off employees, which Business Insider exclusively obtained, said the decision to eliminate roles was made "after careful consideration of Oracle's current business needs" and was part of "broader organizational change."

According to LinkedIn posts from laid-off employees, the cuts affected staff across Oracle Health, Sales, Cloud, Customer Success, and NetSuite.

The reduction in head count comes as Oracle invests heavily in data center infrastructure while looking for ways to rein in costs. Oracle's stock is down about 15% over the last year.

In March, Oracle executives told investors not to worry about its significant data center spending because the company is "very, very good" at cost-cutting.

In January, Business Insider reported that the company was struggling to find financing for Stargate, its $500 billion data center initiative with OpenAI. In February, Oracle announced a $50 billion debt raise to help fund its infrastructure buildout.

Across the tech industry, major companies have been reducing their workforces. Many bosses have cited AI in their layoff notifications.

In January, Amazon said it would slash about 16,000 corporate roles, months after cutting 14,000 employees. Meta axed around 8,000 staffers in May, and Dell's recent 10-K filing showed that employee numbers have fallen by 36,000 over the last three years, a 27% decline in head count.

• Anthropic's Boris Cherny says companies are right to focus on their ROI for AI.
• At the same time, Cherny said employees at all levels and roles still need tokens to be able to experiment with AI.
• Then, the Claude Code creator said, companies can start to control costs.

Claude Code creator Boris Cherny has a message for companies that are nervous about their AI token budgets.

"ROI is absolutely the right framing because you don't want to just think about cost because you kind of spend something on it and you get something back," Cherny said during a recent fireside chat at Scale AI.

Jesse Chen, Meta's director of product management who moderated the chat, asked the Anthropic employee directly about the recent concerns raised by Uber COO Andrew Macdonald about whether the rideshare giant's AI spending was leading to enough of a return to justify the rising cost of AI tokens.

Tokens are units of text that serve as a measurement for AI usage, such as the prompts processed by large language models, including those that power chatbots like Anthropic's Claude or its generative AI coding tool, Claude Code.

Cherny said it's right to be focused on ROI. It's also important, he said, not to overdo it in response to cost concerns.

"The way to do this is give people tokens and give them safety to experiment so they feel like they can try stuff and they're not going to get penalized for it," he said. "Once you find these internal use cases that kind of work, then you want to control the costs and you want to do that on the backend, not on the front end."

Otherwise, companies might miss out on the best ideas for deploying AI.

"Often, some of the most interesting ideas and the most innovative ways to improve processes and new product ideas are going to come from an accountant somewhere in the corner of the org or a marketing person that the CEO has never heard of," Cherny said.

Cherny emphasized that Anthropic offers several ways for its enterprise customers to control costs and set budgets, including per-seat cost controls.

Others in the AI space, including OpenAI CEO Sam Altman, are also increasingly discussing companies' concerns about the ROI of their AI investments.

As Cherny mentioned, AI firms like Anthropic are essentially token generators. That also means that they have an incentive to keep selling their models and generative AI tools, especially as they approach highly anticipated IPOs. The creator of Claude Code said that Anthropic is also paying attention to how its tokens are used.

"They're not free for us because every token we use is a token we do not give to a customer, so there's an opportunity cost," he said. "When I think about it, it actually maybe comes back to ROI."

Measuring that ROI is also changing, Cherny said, as the pace of AI model advancements continues to accelerate. He previously said that companies may have looked at the percentage of code written by AI. Cherny said that measurement is no longer as useful once more people let AI write 100% of their code, as he does.

"Then think about, how much is the code per engineer accelerating? And then the third thing to think about is like, what are the other bottlenecks that are getting in the way?" he said. "Because once you get it to this point where engineers are just writing a lot of code, the bottleneck is going to be like good ideas. So, how do you un-hobble that so that your company can generate ideas faster?

• CFOs are taking charge of AI spending as companies pour billions into the technology.
• Some are introducing AI budgets and new controls to keep costs from spiraling.
• "The CFO is really becoming the face of the AI story," said a PwC advisor to finance chiefs.

At Match Group, every employee now has an AI budget.

The parent company of Tinder, Hinge, and other dating apps recently began giving department heads a set amount to spend on AI, which is then distributed across their teams. Employees can track their usage on a dashboard, and if they want to exceed their budget, they have to explain why. The company's most expensive AI models also aren't available by default and require a specific use case.

"If you don't set guardrails, there's no reason for an engineer to not go use the most expensive model," said Match Group CFO Steve Bailey. The average software engineer at the company spends roughly $600 a month on AI tokens, he said.

Match Group's system reflects a growing reality across corporate America: As companies spend billions on AI, CFOs are emerging as some of the most powerful executives in the AI era.

Finance chiefs are doing more than signing off on AI budgets. In many cases, they're the ones deciding who gets access to AI tools, how much employees can spend, which vendors make the cut, and whether AI investments are generating enough value to justify costs.

"The CFO is really becoming the face of the AI story," said Peter Pollini, a PwC advisor to finance chiefs in the financial-services sector.

A spending boom

The stakes are enormous. Match Group initially allocated $5 million for AI this year, but it's now on track to spend double that amount, Bailey said. The increase followed CEO Spencer Rascoff's May push to make the company more AI-native by expanding access to AI tools across the workforce. Initially, they were available mainly to engineers.

"Aside from maybe travel and entertainment, we've never had to budget for a cost that's this big at the employee level," Bailey said.

To help fund those investments, Bailey said Match Group plans to dramatically slow hiring while it assesses how AI could reshape its workforce.

Across corporate America, similar calculations are turning CFOs into the gatekeepers of one of the biggest spending booms in decades.

At Elevance Health, CFO Mark Kaye oversees a hidden way of keeping AI costs from spiraling. The insurance giant quietly routes employees' queries to different AI models based on the complexity of the request. That's because a single prompt can cost anywhere from a few pennies to more than a dollar, depending on how many tokens, or units of data, employees gobble up.

"We manage it on the back end," said Kaye, adding that he expects Elevance Health, the parent of Anthem Blue Cross Blue Shield, to invest $1 billion or more on AI this year.

Making AI pay off

Some CFOs are making tough decisions about how to fund AI expenses at large, such as by freezing annual salary raises and laying off workers. Others say AI is helping to pay for itself.

Kaye said AI automation at Elevance has reduced administrative work tied to medical-chart reviews by roughly 40%, giving staff more time to support customers.

"There are significant inefficiencies in the system that AI is allowing us to take out," he said.

Keeping a tight leash on AI spending isn't the only new hurdle for CFOs. They're also responsible for managing spending on a category that is evolving more rapidly than previous generations of enterprise software.

For the first time this year, Xero, a global small-business platform that offers accounting, payroll, and payments, added a line item to its budget for AI token spending per employee, said Claire Bramley, the CFO. The company also created a task force to review software purchases and identify AI products it can do without.

"Do we have more than one tool that serves the same purpose?" Bramley said. "As a CFO, you want to make sure that everybody's not going off and doing their own thing."

AI is also changing who CFOs spend time with. Bramley said finance, technology, and HR leaders at Xero now work together more frequently to evaluate software purchases, hiring plans, and how AI could affect future staffing needs.

"You could probably do it once a month before, and I think you have to do it weekly today," she said.

Additional headaches

CFOs are also facing new business problems arising from AI.

Netta Samroengraja, finance chief at healthcare platform Zocdoc, said her team has had to hustle to evaluate AI tool providers to solve problems that, ironically, were created by the technology. In recruiting, for instance, the technology suddenly enabled job seekers to flood the company with applications and create phony personas.

"It was pretty prevalent very quickly, and so we had to react quickly," Samroengraja said.

That wasn't the only surprise, as the economics of AI were shifting, too. Early on, Zocdoc raced to vet vendors, anticipating that prices designed to attract customers at the start of the AI boom would increase over time.

The company used that window to test multiple providers and compare their cost and effectiveness before settling on the tools that delivered the strongest business results, Samroengraja said, adding that Zocdoc has been willing to spend more on tools that produce measurable business outcomes rather than optimize for the lowest possible AI spend.

"If you see the ROI in it, you should keep investing in this," she said.

A crowded AI market is making those decisions even harder. New providers are constantly pitching tools that promise to boost productivity, cut costs, or replace existing software, forcing many CFOs to take a more active role in evaluating vendors, said Alex Sobol, cofounder of the Millennium Alliance, an invite-only community for C-suite executives in North America and Europe.

"It seems like every hour there's a new AI vendor," he said. "It's hard to know what's real and what's fake, and what's good and what's bad."

• New York health regulators say Tiger Medical smuggled alloClae into the state and lied about it.
• A court filing includes photos of boxes piled in the driveway of a New Jersey nurse who regulators allege drove the product to NYC.
• Tiger says only the FDA, not New York State, can regulate alloClae, and denied wrongdoing.

On a blustery December day, nine large white cardboard boxes sat stacked next to a garbage can in the driveway of a New Jersey nurse as a man packed them into the bed of a pickup truck.

Other than a manufacturer's label in the corner and a note that the contents were perishable and shouldn't be frozen, there was no indication they held thousands of dollars' worth of processed cadaver fat. Inside the boxes, state regulators allege, was alloClae, a hot new injectable filler derived from the fat of dead people and headed to high-end cosmetic surgeon practices in New York City.

Photos of the boxes were part of a recent court filing by New York State health officials, who have accused Tiger Medical Holdings, which manufactures and sells alloClae with its affiliates, of "smuggling" the product into New York.

Tiger has said only the Food and Drug Administration has the authority to regulate alloClae, and that FDA rules don't require premarket approval. New York is one of a handful of states that issues permission to store and distribute human tissue, and it claims that Tiger violated those rules by bringing alloClae to market without waiting for approval.

Recent court filings reveal that the state obtained FedEx records, including photos, in an attempt to prove that Tiger organized a scheme to smuggle hundreds of boxes of the product — possibly over $1 million worth — into New York.

The dispute could affect the availability of a product that lets busy C-suiters get a boob job during a lunch break or a butt lift between meetings. Doctors have said the injectable is flying off the shelves, and some have continued to administer it during the state investigation.

Tiger co-CEO Oliver Burckhardt said in a filing on Wednesday that 60 doctors have contacted the company about the fat spat with New York — some worried about the case, but most wanting to buy more alloClae.

Tiger hasn't disputed shipping alloClae through New Jersey, though it has called the state's evidence "unreliable" and "self-serving," and said the allegation of "smuggling" is baseless and inflammatory.

It said the health department kept asking for more information without signaling concerns until last month, and that the company submitted testing data as recently as January to show that alloClae was safe.

Tiger's lawyer, Larry Wood Jr., did not address specific questions from Business Insider, referring a reporter to Tiger's court filings.

Building buzz for alloClae while dealing with regulators

AlloClae hit the market in 2024. It didn't take long for plastic surgeons on Manhattan's Tribeca and Upper East Side to realize the appeal. Their patients wanted a quick touch-up and were willing to pay for the convenience. In small quantities, the product can be injected for under $10,000; in other cases, it can cost up to $100,000 per procedure.

The product is a good fit for "the CEOs, COOs, CCOs that don't want to be away from the boardroom," Douglas Steinbrech, who practices in New York City, Beverly Hills, and Chicago, told Business Insider last year. "They have to go to a lot of meetings that just pop up, and they cannot control when they're going to happen. They can't just clear their schedule to recover for a surgery."

AlloClae was advertised on social media and websites: "Revolutionary," said one clinic. "Pure Gold. On Demand," said another.

In a video posted by a Texas plastic surgery practice, audio of Oprah gifting cars to a screaming audience was dubbed over a man in scrubs pretending to dole out alloClae boxes to employees who wriggled with excitement.

Tiger, which is privately held, said this month that alloClae is experiencing "rapid growth" and the company plans to build a 200-person sales force by the end of 2027 to sell alloClae and a similar product in development, dermaClae, to surgeons, med spas, and other buyers.

When Business Insider spoke to Tiger Aesthetics at the end of last year, the company said it was struggling to keep up with demand. Behind the scenes, it was grappling with more than a shortage.

The company was engaged in a back-and-forth with New York's health department. Between October 2024 and May 2025, the agency sent three letters saying that it could not grant Tiger permission to distribute alloClae in the state.

In July 2025, a health inspector visited two Tiger tissue facilities in Pennsylvania and asked why New York doctors were advertising alloClae. Monica Garcia, the COO of Tiger Aesthetic's parent company, said she was unaware of any shipments to the state and asked what the consequences would be if there were, according to a sworn statement from Joseph Giovannetti, the agency's top investigator.

Garcia, in a sworn statement, said the exchange took place at a Tiger affiliate where employees familiar with alloClae weren't present. She said the inspector didn't ask for follow-up information about alloClae distribution to New York, disputing one of Giovannetti's claims.

Giovannetti said the inspection prompted Tiger to stop shipping alloClae directly to New York and start going through New Jersey and Connecticut.

Despite the letters and inspection, Caroline Van Hove, the president of Tiger Medical Holdings affiliate Tiger Aesthetics, provided reassurances about alloClae to at least one New York plastic surgeon. "We can confirm that the New York Department of Health has not reached out to us in connection with our alloClae product," she wrote in an April 2026 letter seen by Business Insider.

Boxes of alloClae were piled up in a New Jersey driveway

Every week or two, starting no later than September 2025, a new set of white boxes would appear at the clapboard, shuttered home of Robert McGee, a nurse who lived on a cul-de-sac in the central New Jersey town of Tinton Falls, according to FedEx records and a state investigator's statement.

The boxes of alloClae would be stacked next to duffle bags and trash cans in McGee's driveway or on his front porch, according to delivery photos and Giovannetti.

Between September 2025 and April 2026, the company sent over 330 boxes of alloClae to McGee, who loaded them in his pickup, drove them the 50 miles into Manhattan, and dropped them off at more than three dozen plastic surgeons and med spas, Giovannetti said.

McGee did not respond to requests for comment.

In January 2026, the state said in a filing that an unidentified "whistleblower" told regulators what was happening. Three months later, health investigators made an "unannounced inspection" at the office of Dr. Adam Schaffner, a Manhattan plastic surgeon.

Schaffner's paper trail laid out a shift in Tiger's shipping processes. Invoices from July 2025 showed Tiger had sent alloClae directly to his Fifth Avenue office. But starting in August, the month after the inspection, the products were mailed to homes and offices in New Jersey and Connecticut, and employees or Ubers would courier them across state lines, the health department said.

Schaffner, who declined to comment, received at least $95,000 worth of alloClae initially shipped to addresses outside of New York, according to invoices filed in court records.

Some boxes went to the New York City office of plastic surgeon Matthew Schulman, the FedEx records show. In a YouTube video posted last fall, he gleefully unpacked 287.5 cubic centimeters of alloClae as the Pointer Sisters' "I'm So Excited" played in the background. Schulman's name, with McGee's home address, was visible on a shipping label.

If Schulman's boxes were typical — as a review of more than a dozen plastic surgeons' unboxing videos on Instagram suggests — a total of 15,840 cubic centimeters of alloClae could have been sent via McGee's home. The prices on 11 of Schaffner's invoices filed in court average $86.29 per cubic centimeter; at that price, more than $1.3 million worth of alloClae could have been shipped through McGee.

Schulman did not respond to requests for comment.

Tiger has asked that the state's allegations be struck from the court record because, among other things, they argue, the health department could be cherry-picking from its investigative file to benefit their case.

Some New York surgeons are still using alloClae

Doctors who received alloClae say they ordered the product from Tiger and didn't know the route it took.

"He had no idea that this was a challenge, or how stuff was showing up, or any of that," said Ken Sterling, an attorney for Dr. Jason Emer. Sterling said Emer has not been contacted by medical authorities.

Samira Shamoon, a publicist for Dr. Darren Smith, said in an email that "when Dr. Smith was using AlloClae, he purchased it directly from the company and had no knowledge of irregularities." Smith is no longer offering the product, she said.

ME Plastic Surgery, which has locations on Manhattan's Fifth Avenue and in Queens, recently updated a blog post to say that it is not offering alloClae.

Several New York doctors said in early June that they're still using alloClae. Tiger has said it's suspending distribution to New York, but the product can still be "legally sold." In the meantime, doctors in the state continue to promote it.

Emer posted an Instagram video on June 12 showing himself injecting alloClae into a patient's buttocks.

"Don't be left behind," the caption reads, along with a peach emoji. The geotag: New York City.

• Buying rental properties is a popular way to get into real estate investing, but it's not passive.
• Experienced real estate investors are shifting from rentals to more passive strategies.
• Two popular, more hands-off strategies are real estate syndications and private money lending.

A popular way to get started in real estate investing is by buying a rental property. After finding and closing on a deal, investors place a tenant and ideally collect more in rent than they owe each month on the mortgage and expenses. Whatever is left over is cash flow.

It can be a lucrative income stream, but real estate investors are upfront about one caveat: It's not passive. Owning rentals means dealing with tenant turnover, maintenance requests, vacancies, repairs, and, in some cases, evictions.

That's why some experienced investors are using rentals as a launching pad. Once they've built capital and experience, they're shifting to more passive strategies that allow them to keep exposure to real estate without taking on the day-to-day responsibilities of being a landlord.

Two such strategies have come up repeatedly in Business Insider's conversations with financially independent investors: real estate syndications and private money lending.

Real estate syndications

A syndication allows investors to put money into a larger real-estate deal — such as an apartment complex, student-housing development, or boutique hotel — without personally buying or operating the property. A sponsor or operator manages the deal, while investors typically receive cash-flow distributions and, if the property is eventually sold for a profit, a share of the proceeds.

Cody Berman, who started with a house hack and later bought rentals that generated enough cash flow for him to live on, said much of his real-estate exposure today comes through syndications.

"My return on effort in my main business, my digital-products business, is a lot higher than my return on effort in real estate," he said. "I still want the real-estate exposure, but I don't want to go out there and just buy a 20-unit apartment building myself and then have to get it tenanted and figure out how to set up all the maintenance stuff."

In a syndication, Berman said, he might invest in a 100-unit apartment complex in another part of the country — a property he has never seen in person — because he trusts the operator running the deal.

"I will invest a chunk of money with them for some set period of time, usually somewhere from three to seven years," he said. "I'll make money every quarter on cash-flow distributions based on the rent the property is generating. And then if there is a sale event, which is usually the goal of a syndicator, then I'll get all my money back and some more in the form of a check."

He described it as "owning rental properties without actually having to own rental properties."

There are trade-offs. Investors in syndications generally do not have the same control or upside as the general partner running the deal. Their money is also typically locked up for years.

Choosing the right operator is crucial, added Berman, who relies on referrals, interviews, and research.

"Pretty much everyone that I've ever invested with has been through a word-of-mouth referral plus an interview, talking to the person, doing my research."

Private money lending

Another strategy experienced investors use to keep real estate in their portfolio without owning additional property is private money lending. Instead of buying or renovating properties themselves, they lend money to other investors who need capital for deals.

To get started in private lending, you need capital and, ideally, a presence within your local real estate community. Real estate is a relationships business, and typically, the broader your network, the more opportunities you'll encounter.

Carl and Mindy Jensen, who grew their net worth to more than $5 million and retired early, have tried a variety of investment strategies, including live-in flipping. They said that private lending is one of their favorite strategies.

"The private lending generates such a nice return that it's difficult to be like, 'No, we don't want to have the easy money. Let's go do another live-in flip,'" said Mindy. "But we're also in a much different financial position now than we were when we started live-in flipping, and I think that's important to note: You could still make money live-in flipping, and if you have more time than money, it can be a really great way to turn your home into an investment."

Josh and Ali Lupo, another financially independent couple, started lending to other real-estate investors in 2025, and it's resulted in double-digit returns.

"There are some industry standards," Josh said. "In the private money lending world, 10 to 12% interest is very common. That's the baseline."

The lender generally determines the terms of the loan, he added, and the rate can vary depending on the deal's length.

Private lending is not risk-free. One of the main risks is that the borrower fails to repay the loan, which makes vetting both the borrower and the deal essential. That due diligence takes time, but once the Lupos have completed their research and decided to fund a deal, the process itself is relatively hands-off, said Josh.

"It takes us 30 minutes driving to the bank, wiring the funds, and then the investor that is borrowing the money sends us updates, and that's the extent of it."

• Cooley is joining a sudden rush of law firms creating their own AI technology, with help from Legora.
• Cooley Go Lab is an online portal built to help startups with routine contract review and drafting.
• The portal will be available exclusively to founders in Y Combinator's summer cohort to start.

Law firms know more clients are asking chatbots for advice before ever calling a lawyer. So legal giant Cooley is building technology that it hopes founders will use instead.

Cooley plans to give select startups access to Cooley Go Lab, an online portal where founders can upload files and ask questions about their documents, Matt Bartus, global cochair of Cooley's emerging companies and venture capital practice, told Business Insider.

To build it, Cooley teamed up with Legora, a fast-growing legal technology startup that sells to law firms and corporate legal departments. Last year, Legora entered a new line of business with what it calls "portals" — white-labeled workspaces where law firms and their clients can work together on legal matters.

Cooley Go Lab is aimed at catching a common startup problem early, Bartus said. Founders often handle routine contracts themselves to avoid outside counsel's hourly rates. That can leave startups with a trail of messy agreements that their first in-house lawyer has to unwind later.

Legora founder Max Junestrand knows the problem well. When he started the company at age 23, he said he used an early version of ChatGPT to rewrite contracts. Junestrand, a software engineer, not a lawyer, said he let some early contracts include an unlimited liability clause — a provision that can leave a company exposed to damages far beyond the value of the deal.

"When our general counsel started, she freaked out," he said.

Cooley is now trying to give the next crop of founders a way to use artificial intelligence to move faster, but with a law firm's guardrails around it.

Cooley Go Lab will have a limited rollout to start. It will be available first to startups in Y Combinator's summer cohort.

Much has changed for startups since Legora's turn in the famed startup accelerator. Teams can write code and release technology faster with coding agents. They are signing customers and growing revenue earlier, and the hottest companies seem to be raising funding nonstop. But moving faster also means legal work that once came later in a startup's life is being pulled closer to the beginning.

At Y Combinator, partner Gustaf Alströmer is seeing that shift play out in real time. In the last batch, a record 14 startups reached $1 million in annual recurring revenue — the amount of revenue a company expects to collect over a year. Alströmer said giving founders access to tools like Cooley Go Lab could help them keep that pace without creating contract-slop.

The portal includes features that review documents like nondisclosure and contractor agreements and flag issues for founders to consider. The tool also draws on Cooley Go, the firm's central hub of standard startup forms, templates, and guidance.

If you can't beat 'em, join 'em

Law firms like Cooley are facing a new reality. The better the frontier models get at legal work, the more founders and in-house lawyers may decide they can handle situations themselves rather than send them to outside counsel. Anthropic is trying to make that easier with new tools built for contract review and drafting.

Law firms are now figuring out how to stay relevant as more legal work becomes software-enabled. Some are building their own tech. Kirkland & Ellis has tapped Palantir to help it build tools to manage parts of the firm's private funds practice, while Freshfields is working with Anthropic on software that could eventually be sold to other law firms. Harvey, a leader in legal technology, says it's getting into training custom models for law firms.

Taken together, the moves point to a new attitude spreading across Big Law: If clients are going to use artificial intelligence anyway, law firms want to shape how they use it.

Bartus doesn't seem especially concerned about losing business to in-house legal departments. Cooley has been on a hot streak. Profits rose 6.7% to $922 million last fiscal year. The firm also scored a fair use win for Meta in a copyright case involving its model Llama last year, and it advised Jony Ive's hardware startup Io in a $6.5 billion sale to OpenAI.

Bartus is confident that companies will continue to depend on law firms for the important work. Cooley Go Lab, he said, is meant to help founders handle routine legal work more cleanly, not replace lawyers.

Cooley says the tool is not protected by attorney-client privilege, so founders will need to be careful about what they upload because those materials could be turned over in litigation.

"If you want actual legal advice," he said, "you need to talk to a lawyer."

• Rankin Carroll emphasizes the enduring value of entertainment in marketing strategies today.
• Mars shifts focus to personalized, engaging content to better connect with consumers.
• Snickers' UEFA Euro 2024 campaign showcases Mars' innovative approach to consumer engagement.

After more than two decades at Mars, overseeing iconic brands like M&M's, Skittles, and Twix, the company's chief brand officer, Rankin Carroll, says one of the biggest mistakes marketers make today is forgetting a simple idea: entertainment still matters.

As marketers race to embrace AI, data, personalization, influencers, and new measurement tools, Carroll told Business Insider in an interview for its "CMO Insider" podcast that the industry sometimes loses sight of what consumers are actually looking for.

"I think what's critical to cut through is it's still a game of compelling stories," Carroll said. "People are still looking for content that captures their attention."

Carroll's comments come as Mars undergoes a major transformation in how it markets its brands, shifting toward more personalized advertising powered by data and technology.

Yet Carroll says all of those tools matter only if they help brands create entertainment that consumers actually want to spend time with.

Consumers don't want brands talking at them

Carroll says one of the biggest changes in marketing is the growing expectation that consumers participate in brand experiences rather than simply receive messages.

"We can get caught up in the data, we can get caught up in all the technology side of this, but at the end of the day, it's compelling stories well told in engaging ways that they can participate in," he said.

For Carroll, that is where entertainment comes in. Instead of interrupting consumers with ads, Mars increasingly wants to give them experiences they choose to engage with.

That philosophy has shaped several recent Mars campaigns.

Carroll pointed to a Snickers activation built around the UEFA Euro 2024 soccer tournament.

The campaign partnered with Meta and WhatsApp to let consumers send personalized messages to friends using an AI-powered José Mourinho character. Users entered prompts about mistakes their friends had made, and the system generated custom responses in Mourinho's voice.

Rather than simply promoting Snickers, Mars built the campaign to tap into behavior that it already understood about soccer fandom.

"We know the behavior around the Euros around football is banter," Carroll said. "You want to banter with your mates."

The result was an entertaining experience that consumers could actively participate in and share. "It just exploded," Carroll said.

Mars says personalization works best when it's entertaining

Carroll believes personalization has become an expectation, particularly among younger consumers.

"What we know is that consumers now, especially younger consumers, expect personalization from brands," he said.

But he does not view personalization as simply delivering more targeted advertisements. Instead, Mars is trying to build experiences that allow consumers to participate in the creation of content itself.

The Snickers campaign was one example. Another was the "Twix Harmonizer," a tool that allowed users to send voice notes to friends that would soften bad news through AI-generated audio.

Again, Carroll says the appeal was not the technology itself but rather giving people something entertaining to do.

"You cut through by creating an experience that they can actually participate in," he said.

Why Mars thinks many marketers are overcomplicating things

Carroll says that digital platforms have made it harder for brands to break through. Social media feeds are crowded, algorithms constantly change, and consumers have more content choices than ever.

Still, he says marketers sometimes focus too heavily on data, technology, and optimization while overlooking the importance of creating something people genuinely enjoy.

"I think that's the word that we've slightly forgotten about. Entertainment," Carroll said.

That thinking also influences how Mars approaches culture.

Whether it's Skittles creating unusual campaigns, Snickers building interactive experiences, or M&M's responding to controversy through humor, Carroll says brands need to find ways to participate in culture without losing their identities.

"We can bring something to you," he says of consumers.

For Carroll, that remains the foundation of effective marketing regardless of how technology evolves.

"At the end of the day," he said, "it's compelling stories well told in engaging ways that they can participate in."

This as-told-to essay is based on a conversation with Kymm Dracup, a 56-year-old based in Toronto. It's been edited for length and clarity.

My daughter says, "Don't worry, Mom, you'll get a job. I've seen your résumé, you're great." I don't think my daughter realizes the effect that my age, 56, has on my confidence and finding work.

I was unemployed for 22 months before landing a temporary consulting job a few months ago. There's no guarantee for a transition to full-time work, and I'm really scared about my future.

I've been rejected countless times, and I recently got evicted from my home. Unfortunately, I think my confidence took a hit, and my desperation for a job is coming through in my interviews.

I never learned why I lost my last job

I was the head of the management team for a group travel company for three years. In 2024, my job was terminated.

I asked for a reason, but I was never given one. In Ontario, you don't legally need to give a reason, so that was it.

It was very tough on my confidence to get let go. I still don't know the reason, but my best guess is that they were bringing in younger people with fresh eyes and innovations to replace me.

It's difficult to prove that age is hindering my job search

After losing my job, I started applying wherever I could, mostly for travel jobs, and later, any sales job. I received rejection after rejection.

I've been stood up for interviews, received automated rejections, and even had recruiters find excuses to end calls after seeing my face on camera.

Have you ever felt your age was a factor in a job rejection? Scroll down to the comments and share your experience.

It feels obvious to me that age is a factor in why I can't find a job, but the tricky thing is that there's no real way to prove that any of these rejections are due to my age. It hurts, and I don't feel as though recruiters see my value.

Applying to jobs felt different 5 years ago

When I was on the job market five years ago, I don't think AI was being used to sort through résumés.

Additionally, I've never interviewed online before now, and quite frankly, it's a bit intimidating. Therefore, I may not come across as confident, as there is an insecurity factor lending to the video.

I know how to sell myself in person, but I find it difficult, especially at my age, to do so over Zoom. You can be vibrant, brilliant, and all these things, but it's tricky because my generation is so geared to meeting people face to face. That is where we shine.

There are also only so few jobs available. I applied for an entry-level receptionist role for a yoga studio, and they stood me up for my interview. So many people are looking for jobs, and I think older people might not be the first to get hired.

I think my desperation for a job is making it harder to get one

As a single woman in my 50s, I don't have a partner to financially support me during this time. I feel desperate to find a job, and though I don't want it to come across that way to hiring managers, I think they can feel it.

When I get another rejection, the self-doubt that I'm worthless, too old, and that nobody will hire me comes back up, and the desperation intensifies. It's a vicious cycle. I try to tell myself, "Kymm, pull up your socks. Let's go. Go on to the next interview," but in the back of my mind, the doubt is still there.

Sometimes I'm joining an interview after not leaving the house or speaking to people for days. When I get an interview, I can't just snap my fingers and get out of that dark place.

I got evicted from my home and moved in with my daughter

My daughter has offered to let me stay in her home since I now have an income. I'm helping her pay bills while I figure it out.

I think it's very difficult for her to have a parent who is all of a sudden in need. I raised her as a single mom. I was strong, and now I just crumpled to the ground.

I've been in a really dark place, and I know that's not easy for her. What is helping me through this time is turning to God. I have to believe in something.

I wish I had been more prepared for unemployment in my 50s

Most people coming out of university these days are learning AI and are up to date with modern technology. When you bring in someone my age, it's different because the technology we had in school was pretty archaic.

I had no idea how difficult it would be to navigate the job market. I wish I were more prepared for all of the "no"s because it can be really hard on your self-esteem.

I wish that life experience were viewed as a more valuable asset in the workplace. It's been very hard to get out of that dark mindset when I keep receiving rejections. My advice is to find a way to believe in something better for yourself.

Sometimes belief is all you have, so you've got to hold onto it.

Are you navigating a career change in your 50s? Contact this reporter at tmartinelli@businessinsider.com to share your story.

• Elon Musk sounded the alarm about Taiwan's vulnerability to a Chinese invasion, per a new book.
• He told Trump and tech CEOs that the US was "headed for disaster" in the event of a Chinese invasion.
• Musk was in a meeting where the CEOs discussed the possibility of bringing chipmaking to US shores.

Elon Musk expressed grave concern about Taiwan's dominance in the chip market — and the possibility of a Chinese invasion — in a tech CEO meeting at the White House last year, according to a book published on Tuesday about President Donald Trump's second term.

The book, "Regime Change: Inside the Imperial Presidency of Donald Trump," by The New York Times' Maggie Haberman and Jonathan Swan, reported that the SpaceX owner had met with Trump and the CEOs of firms such as Dell, Qualcomm, and Intel on March 10, 2025.

Haberman and Swan wrote that Musk told the gathering in the Roosevelt Room that he was "shitting bricks about our vulnerability to China."

But Musk had grown increasingly alarmed in recent years, especially over the threat of a Chinese invasion of Taiwan, which would jeopardize the supply of high-end chips that Musk's companies depended on.

And now, with these CEOs as his audience, Musk was frantically sounding the alarm about the fact that an island country roughly the size of Maryland, floating eighty-one miles off mainland China, produced around 70 percent of all the semiconductors on earth and 90 percent of the most advanced chips. He was lecturing a gathering more familiar with this problem than perhaps any other group of people in the world. But Musk kept banging away.

"If we don't start building chips outside the zone of confrontation," he said, "we are headed for disaster." He reiterated the point: "Somebody's got to build the damn fabs [fabrication plants] outside the battle zone!"

According to the book, Trump said China's leader, Xi Jinping, had given assurances that Beijing would not launch an invasion of Taiwan while the former sat in the White House.

But Haberman and Swan reported that Trump added a caveat: "Could be lying. Taiwan is the apple of Xi's eye, just like Ukraine was for Putin."

The group of CEOs, alongside Trump and Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick, then discussed how the US might claw back some of the world's semiconductor supply chain and shift factories from Asia to American soil.

"The United States will only have thirty percent of TSMC's capacity in 2029. If China invades Taiwan, the entire economy crashes," Musk said, per the book.

In May, Musk and other American tech CEOs, including Nvidia's Jensen Huang and Apple's Tim Cook, accompanied Trump on an official visit to China.

Musk was widely regarded as a figure who could help stabilize Beijing and Washington's economic ties.

Tesla operates a major factory, Gigafactory 3, in Shanghai that employs roughly 20,000 workers. The American automaker enjoys the rare arrangement of wholly owning the factory without needing a joint venture with a Chinese firm.

The White House and Musk did not immediately respond to requests for comment sent outside regular business hours by Business Insider.

"Regime Change: Inside the Imperial Presidency of Donald Trump" is available for purchase on Amazon.

• The age of freewheeling AI spending may be coming to an end.
• Consulting firms are rethinking how much they, and their clients, spend on AI.
• Tell us how spending at your consulting firm has changed.

Companies are learning that there's such a thing as spending too much on AI.

As the cost of AI tools grows, executives are recalibrating. Amazon recently removed its employee-made leaderboard for tracking AI token usage because it encouraged excessive spending. Walmart, which developed a vibe-coding tool for employees, recently set limits on the use of tokens. Uber COO Andrew MacDonald said it's hard to justify the money his company is spending on AI.

Cisco Chief Product Officer Jeetu Patel also pushed back on the cost of tokens. He said at an event recently that the price is "far higher than the actual value these tokens are generating at scale."

For the consulting industry, the rise of AI was a near-existential threat. At first glance, chatbots can do a lot of the work of consultants, particularly those early in their careers. Most firms moved quickly to attract clients who needed help integrating the technology into their own companies. And they quickly adopted it themselves.

KPMG, for example, has built a dashboard to track how often employees in its US advisory division use AI tools, part of a broader effort to move from basic adoption to more sophisticated use. McKinsey plans to go further. CEO Bob Sternfels said in January that the firm uses roughly 25,000 AI agents alongside its 40,000 human employees, and hopes one or more agents will eventually support every employee.

The surge in spending, however, has raised a question: Are companies investing in AI strategically or simply spending to avoid being left behind? It's something consulting firms are working to answer for both their clients and themselves.

Tell us how AI spending has changed at your consulting firm:

For now, the answer appears to be: keep spending, but more strategically.

In a recent report on corporate AI investment, Boston Consulting Group found that companies expect to more than double their AI spending in 2026, from roughly 0.8% of revenue to about 1.7%. For large enterprises, that shift represents billions of dollars flowing into AI strategies that remain, in many cases, experimental and difficult to measure.

Russell Fradin, CEO and cofounder of Larridin, a platform that helps companies — including major consulting firms — measure the returns on AI usage, said the spending trend will continue.

"We haven't seen anyone talking about spending less in AI next year," Fradin told Business Insider. "They're just talking about instrumenting to understand where it goes."

Companies, Fradin said, are coming to the consensus that they "can't 10x spend every year forever."

• The US restricted Anthropic's new cybersecurity AI models, prompting the company to suspend all access.
• The restrictions are creating winners and losers in the red-hot AI race.
• Mistral and DeepSeek could benefit as sovereignty concerns boost the appeal of open-weight models.

One company's headache may be another's opportunity.

The White House's restrictions on access to Anthropic's new AI models have created winners and losers across the AI industry.

On Friday, US officials restricted access to Anthropic's cybersecurity-focused models, Mythos 5 and Fable 5, after concluding safeguards designed to prevent misuse of Fable 5 could be bypassed. The restrictions block foreign nationals from accessing the systems. In response, Anthropic shut down access for everyone.

The move has dealt a direct blow to Anthropic. But it may also strengthen the position of AI companies providing more open models that their customers can deploy and control themselves.

Here are the biggest winners and losers.

Mistral

The verdict: Winner.

Why: The French startup has spent more than a year making the case that Europe should not become dependent on American AI providers.

Unlike Anthropic, whose most advanced models are accessed through company-controlled systems, Mistral has championed open-weight models that customers can deploy on their own infrastructure and customize using their own data.

The Anthropic restrictions gave its CEO, Arthur Mensch, a real-world example of the risk he has been warning about.

In an X post on Tuesday, Mensch doubled down on Mistral's sovereignty pitch, saying the company's upcoming models would be open-weight because users should be able to "own, inspect, audit, or improve" the AI systems they use.

The timing couldn't be much better for Mistral.

France announced this week that its domestic intelligence agency would replace Palantir's AI data tools with those of a French provider, with Prime Minister Sébastien Lecornu warning against "strategic dependencies" on foreign technology.

DeepSeek

The verdict: Winner.

Why: Like Mistral, DeepSeek's open-weight approach may suddenly look more attractive.

Unlike Anthropic's Mythos 5 and Fable 5 models, which are controlled by the company, DeepSeek's models can be downloaded, modified, and deployed by customers themselves.

That makes DeepSeek a beneficiary if governments and businesses begin prioritizing control and sovereignty over access to the latest closed models.

The episode also gives China an opportunity to argue that reliance on US AI providers comes with geopolitical risks, giving it a boost in an increasingly narrowing AI race. During an Anthropic event last month, its CEO, Dario Amodei, said Chinese AI models were roughly 6 to 12 months behind leading US AI systems.

Anthropic

The verdict: Loser.

Why: Anthropic is the company directly affected by the restrictions.

The export controls block foreign nationals, including Anthropic's own employees, from accessing Mythos 5 and Fable 5, which limits the company's ability to distribute some of its most advanced systems internationally.

More importantly, the episode highlights a potential weakness of closed AI models. Because Anthropic controls access to its systems, governments can, in turn, exert greater influence over who can use them.

The episode is also the latest headache for Anthropic in a monthslong spat with the White House after the AI firm said its technology should not be used for domestic mass surveillance or fully autonomous weapons systems.

In response, the US government designated Anthropic a supply chain risk, then Anthropic challenged the move in court.

US AI companies with closed models

The verdict: Short-term winners, long-term losers.

Why: While the restrictions may give a short-term boost to Anthropic's US rivals, it also raises uncomfortable questions for them down the road.

Companies including OpenAI, Google, and xAI primarily distribute their most advanced models through platforms and services they control.

Meta is a partial exception. While some models in its Llama family are open-weight, the company has increasingly been moving towards closed models that it has tighter control over, such as Muse Spark.

For governments and businesses, the Anthropic episode serves as a reminder that access to AI can ultimately depend on decisions made by providers and the governments that oversee them.

That dynamic could strengthen the appeal of sovereign and open-weight alternatives in Europe and elsewhere.

Presented by LinkedIn Ads.

CMO Insider is the podcast where marketing power players share candid takes, career lessons, and the power moves shaping the future of the industry.

Hosted by Business Insider's Lara O'Reilly, each episode goes inside the minds of the leaders behind some of the world's biggest brands, campaigns, agencies, and platforms. From brand strategy and creativity to leadership, culture, media, technology, and the business of marketing, CMO Insider offers an honest look at what it takes to build, grow, and lead in a fast-changing industry.

In this episode, Lara speaks with Raja Rajamannar about the art of marketing and much more.

This episode contains a sponsored segment from LinkedIn Ads. Learn more about our sponsor.

• For the past four summers, my family and friends have taken a summer vacation to Colorado.
• But the kids go to summer camp during the day, so we parents get to have fun.
• I think it's important our kids see us be adults outside being parents.

For the past three summers, my friends and I have driven our families to Colorado to work remotely, be playful adults, and, in some ways, mildly neglect our children.

My friends and I work hard to nurture our relationships. Whether it's a constantly changing technological landscape or a precarious job market, the world around us continues to evolve quickly.

Maintaining a sense of interconnectedness in our friend group helps us to feel more stable, but it also allows us to find communal joy, for ourselves, explicitly outside our kids.

To further connect on trips, we take it a step further and send our kids to day camp so we can get some respite from our typical demands.

Sending our kids to camp gives us parents a break

Parental expectations seem endless these days. Under the umbrella of intensive parenting, there seems to be an implicit message: we need to be constantly available to our kids.

There's a steady stream of emails coming from schools, applications to download for every sport, and a birthday party scene that is, at times, unbearable. To avoid burnout, we need to strike a balance; to thrive, we need enjoyment.

To do so, our children attend a very reasonably priced day camp in Colorado while my friends and I take our own vacation.

It is a much-needed escape from commuting to an office, rushing to the school pick-up line, and making it to another early-morning sports game. A lingering benefit of the pandemic is that we are all able to slip into remote work for a short time; we take full advantage of the setup. Consolidating our work so we can enjoy our downtime is the goal for the two weeks in Colorado.

We commit ourselves to having fun and strengthening our bonds, hoping that our kids pick up on the importance of connectedness, friendship, and enjoying life in the face of unpredictability.

It's important our kids see us as real people — not just their parents

It's a nice byproduct that our children see their parents as their own people — adults who pursue fun and find ways to play.

We certainly field many comments about how "it is not fair" that we do fun stuff without them. But this does not deter us.

In fact, last year, during a hike through the scenic Rocky Mountain National Park, we ran into our children while they were on their own camp-sponsored hike.

That evening was full of more demanding questions about how we spend our time.

The fun doesn't end when we pick the kids up from camp

We have been intentional about picking an area where we can also let the kids roam a bit.

After-camp hours are filled with self-guided play and time spent outside. So, our evenings feel like a nice balance between connecting with our kids and giving them time to play with one another.

Through these trips, we also hope to instill a sense of independence and love of nature. The whole experience ends up allowing our kids to learn from each other in ways they won't when we are around, and the grownups get space for uncensored adult time, leaving us with more gas in the tank.

We are all set for our fourth annual trip. While the kids are excited to escape the Texas heat and get to the mountains, we adults have been planning for our own adventures. There has been talk of our favorite pastries for breakfast, tennis, hiking, and white-water rafting…none of which our kids are invited to.

• After traveling to all 50 states solo, I've narrowed down the best cities to visit in the summer.
• Places like Taos, New Mexico, and Anchorage, Alaska, experience milder temperatures in the summer.
• Lubec, Maine, and Carmel-by-the-Sea, California feel like they're straight out of a fairytale.

When the weather gets warmer and the days get longer, I think it's the perfect opportunity to explore new parts of the United States.

After visiting all 50 states solo, I can recommend dozens of places to visit in the summer, but some stand out for their solitude, outdoor activities, accessibility, or great weather.

These are the seven cities and towns I've been telling my friends to visit this year.

Chicago really comes alive in the summer months.

Growing up in Illinois, I spent many summer days in Chicago. But, honestly, it wasn't until I'd visited all 50 states that I understood just how magical the city becomes in the warmer months.

Each summer, Millennium Park hosts a packed calendar of free outdoor concerts and festivals, and the Riverwalk comes alive with outdoor dining and kayakers.

Plus, the lakefront beaches are among my favorites in the country.

Lubec, Maine, is one of my favorite places to visit.

In my opinion, Maine feels like a fairytale in the summer months. With lush forests, rocky coastlines, and quaint fishing villages — you really can't go wrong.

However, the place I find myself recommending most (and dreaming about visiting again) is Lubec. Home to the easternmost point in the contiguous US, this town feels like a Hallmark movie.

I love hiking at West Quoddy Head State Park, staying at The Inn on the Wharf, eating lobster at Fisherman's Wharf Restaurant, and hiking or biking on the Cobscook Shores Trail.

There's so much to do in Taos, New Mexico.

The temperatures in Taos, New Mexico, stay surprisingly mild in the summer months, with highs in the mid-80s and lows ranging from the high-40s to low-50s. This makes it a great destination if you're looking to escape those hot summer nights.

Plus, there's so much to do. I like to visit Taos Pueblo, one of the oldest continuously inhabited communities in North America. Here, visitors can take guided or unguided tours of the Native American village.

When I want to spend some time outside, I hike the Williams Lake Trail, a beautiful 3.8-mile round-trip trek to the lake at the base of Wheeler Peak.

Jackson, Wyoming, is the perfect home base for outdoor adventure.

Summer is absolutely high season in Jackson, Wyoming, but to me, it's still worth battling some traffic to experience.

The town sits right outside Grand Teton National Park, and the outdoor recreation options in the area are almost overwhelming — hiking, fly fishing, rafting the Snake River, and kayaking across beautiful lakes.

Jackson's Town Square is worth an evening of its own for exploring the shops, grabbing dinner or a drink, or attending one of the summer festivals or markets.

Another perk? Jackson Hole Airport is the only commercial airport in the country located entirely within a national park — so you can fly straight into one of the most stunning places in America.

I think Anchorage, Alaska, is a must-visit destination.

I think everyone should experience the magic of Alaska in the summer. The days are incredibly long, the weather is mild, and everything feels more accessible.

Although there are lots of cities I love visiting in the state, Anchorage is my top pick because there's so much to do. I love visiting the Anchorage Museum, hiking the Tony Knowles Coastal Trail, eating at Moose's Tooth Pub and Pizzeria, or grabbing brunch at Biscuitclub.

The town is also a good basecamp for day trips to Seward, the Kenai Peninsula, and Girdwood.

Brevard, North Carolina, is the perfect place to stay if you want to see waterfalls.

I think Western North Carolina is one of the most beautiful parts of the country. However, my favorite town to visit is Brevard.

Located in Transylvania County — known as the "Land of Waterfalls" for its more than 250 cascades — Brevard is the perfect home base for exploring the area.

Within the town itself, I love attending the concerts put on by the Brevard Music Center, a summer training institute for young musicians.

Carmel-by-the-Sea, California, feels like a fairytale.

Even though I've lost count of how many times I've visited Carmel-by-the-Sea, California, I'm still not tired of it.

The downtown area genuinely feels like stepping inside a storybook, with whimsical cottages built in the 1920s, and 41 hidden courtyards and passageways filled with shops and restaurants.

I love staying downtown and just walking between the 17 wine-tasting rooms — it's one of my favorite ways to spend an afternoon.

• A nutritionist uses a simple diet strategy to boost energy, improve gut health, and curb cravings.
• Her 'triple 30' rule makes it easier to get enough protein and fiber without overdoing it.
• It's all about adding healthy foods to your diet, including treats like dark chocolate and popcorn.

Forget proteinmaxxing — a simple three-part rule can help you hit your goals without overdoing it, says a top nutritionist in the UK.

Dominique Ludwig has been helping people eat healthfully for three decades. She said most diet trends offer contradictory advice, wasting your valuable time, money, and energy.

"In a world where nutrition is very confusing, it can actually be really simple," she told Business Insider.

Ludwig's new book, "No Nonsense Nutrition," offers a road map for healthy eating principles that work for both her and her clients.

One of her favorite tips is the "triple 30" rule: eating 30 grams of protein at each meal, 30 grams of fiber each day, and at least 30 different plants in your diet each week.

Ludwig said that within four weeks of following the triple 30 rule, her clients can cut back on processed foods without feeling deprived or relying on complex or strict eating plans.

As a result, they often have reduced cravings and "food noise," better digestion, lower inflammation (which may translate to fewer aches and pains), better mood, and more energy.

"Sometimes you don't need to jump down every rabbit hole. If you just start with the foundation, you suddenly see that food actually can be one of the most transformational things we can do to our health," Ludwig said.

Eat protein at every meal

You're probably already getting enough protein, Ludwig said, but timing it correctly can help you feel full throughout the day.

"It stabilizes your blood sugars. It keeps you feeling fuller for longer," she said. "Having your protein in the morning is really important because if you get breakfast right, it sets the bar for the rest of the day."

She recommends aiming for around 30 grams of protein at each meal through sources like Greek yogurt, fish, chicken, or legumes.

That's about 90 grams of protein per day, although you may need more if you're larger or highly active. Research suggests that adults benefit from around 1.5 grams of protein per kilogram of body weight (or 0.7 grams per pound) daily.

Getting the right amount of protein is also important for a long, healthy life, and we generally need more as we get older to prevent age-related loss of muscle tissue and promote a healthy metabolism.

"Proteins are not only for our muscles, but they're also for repair, they support our immune system, and our neurotransmitters. They're really important," Ludwig said.

Aim for 30 grams of fiber a day

While protein gets all the attention, Ludwig said fiber is an underrated nutrient that supports gut health, weight loss, and more.

"We're living in this massive fiber gap at the moment," she said. "It's the missing link."

Getting enough fiber helps slow digestion, which can promote steadier blood sugar and energy levels, helping you feel more satisfied after meals.

"Protein and fiber are like this dynamic duo; together they're bulky, and that means they switch on all these satiety mechanisms," Ludwig said.

She recommends 30 grams a day, slightly more than typical dietary advice, based on research from the American Gut Project, a study of more than 15,000 people led by the University of California San Diego, that analyzed health and eating habits.

High-fiber diets — rich in foods like beans, nuts, and whole grains — are also linked to a lower risk of chronic illnesses like heart disease and colorectal cancer, making fiber a key nutrient for longevity, too.

Include a variety of plants in your diet

The final 30 in Ludwig's formula refers to including 30 different types of plants in your diet each week, to provide a wide range of nutrients for gut health.

Your digestive system hosts colonies of beneficial bacteria, your microbiome, which play a key role in health, from your mood to your energy levels.

Ludwig compared the microbiome to a zoo: just as giraffes prefer different foods from lions, each type of gut microbe thrives on different micronutrients found in different plants.

Loading up on 30 plants a week is easier than you might think: every little bit counts, from the herbs and spices in your pantry to your morning coffee or tea.

And, she said, don't forget to treat yourself: fresh fruits, popcorn, and dark chocolate all help support a healthier gut in the long term.

• A version of this post appears in the CMO Insider newsletter.
• Sign up for Business Insider's weekly marketing newsletter.

Modern CMOs are getting the promotion they've long wanted: job titles like CGO that reflect their revenue and growth responsibilities. The catch? They're not getting more power.

That's a sharp tension at the heart of a new study shared exclusively with CMO Insider by the brand consultancy Lippincott. The study analyzed a survey of 541 global CMOs or equivalents.

"There is more responsibility but less of that autonomy in terms of getting a strong sense of alignment across the organization," Michael D'Esopo, Lippincott CEO, told me.

Nearly 80% said bureaucracy commonly got in the way of decision-making, while 84% said it was at least "somewhat difficult" to align their management team, senior peers, and other stakeholders around a marketing vision. Fewer than half (44%) said marketing operated with high autonomy.

One unnamed CMO quoted in the report put it this way: "What often happens is that a strong, well-founded idea gets gradually diluted. Someone senior, like a CFO or CCO, adds input that doesn't align with the evidence, and people hesitate to challenge it."

Part of the issue is that many CEOs aren't confident in marketing's ability to demonstrate a financial impact.

"There is a huge trust problem for marketing in the C-suite," former Mastercard CMO Raja Rajamannar told me in a recent interview.

Plenty of studies over the years have suggested marketing has a credibility problem in the corner office. A report released in April from the communications firm Boathouse, for example, found only 13% of CEOs were confident in marketing's ability to demonstrate a financial impact.

Those long-held tensions are being exacerbated by technological shifts, D'Esopo said.

The abundance of AI-powered dashboards and analytics tools has made marketing performance more visible across organizations, D'Esopo said. That can help CMOs appeal to finance leaders by showcasing short-term wins, but it can also reinforce a focus on immediate results at the expense of long-term brand building.

These new tools have also boosted marketing leaders who are steeped in data. Lippincott said 35% of marketing chiefs come from performance- or growth-marketing backgrounds. Around 20% of the senior-most marketing decision-makers don't even have "marketing" in their job title, reflecting the rise of chief growth, chief revenue, and chief commercial officers, per Lippincott.

That can have both good and bad effects.

The rise of performance-minded leaders may bring more analytical rigor to balance out softer marketing metrics. However, Rajamannar said they can use a brute-force approach, likening it to "running constantly on the treadmill." It can lead to chasing the next click, lead, or conversion rather than building the underlying consumer demand.

Short-termism is also creeping into new areas, such as AI search visibility. CMOs surveyed said their companies are spending more on AI while cutting investment in websites and content — the very assets AI systems use to understand and surface brands.

So if that's the diagnosis, what's the antidote?

Lippincott said in the report that CMOs need to use the language of business growth without losing the fundamentals of long-term brand building, which may require translating marketing's impact differently for each separate stakeholder, whether that's the CEO, CFO, or the board. And organizational alignment should be treated as a growth strategy in its own right.

PepsiCo's Jane Wakely, who has possibly the longest job title in the marketing profession — executive vice president, chief consumer and marketing officer, and chief growth officer for international foods — said CMOs should stay focused on the marketing principles that don't change. New technologies such as AI and diverse data sources just give marketers more ways to achieve their goals, she added.

"If I'm reaching a billion people every day, to grow I've got to reach more than a billion — it's quite simple," Wakely said. "That is not going to change."

• A neuroscientist worries some people are letting AI do too much of their thinking.
• Over time, she says, that could weaken cognitive reserve, a key defense against dementia.
• "How you use AI, not how often, will determine its impact," Vivienne Ming told Business Insider.

AI doesn't cause dementia, but how you use it could weaken one of the brain's core defenses against it.

That's the warning from Vivienne Ming, a theoretical neuroscientist, the chief scientist at the Possibility Institute, a metascience research group, and founder of Socos Labs, an AI and education firm.

"Your chatbot is not giving you Alzheimer's," Ming told Business Insider.

"My worry is the cumulative impact of chronic substitution: when you stop doing the cognitive work because something will do it for you, you stop building the reserve that protects you later," she said.

As AI has swiftly become an integral part of people's lives and careers, AI researchers and some tech leaders have been releasing warnings about its deskilling effect, the slow erosion of job skills, and the decline in independent thinking.

Ming went a step further, saying that repeatedly outsourcing mental effort to AI, especially among young people, could have real implications for long-term brain health.

"That's the group from whom I'm most concerned," she said. "How you use AI, not how often, will determine its impact."

Over the long term, Ming worries that routinely outsourcing thinking to AI could reduce cognitive engagement and make it harder to build cognitive reserve — the brain's ability to adapt and remain resilient in the face of damage or aging.

"The mechanism I'm describing is the classic 'use it or lose it,'" Ming said.

'GPT is the new GPS'

To drive her point home, Ming compared the effects of using GPS and an AI chatbot.

Researchers at McGill University in Montreal found in 2020 that people with greater lifetime GPS experience have worse spatial memory during self-guided navigation.

In a four-month small study conducted over four months last year, MIT's Media Lab found that people who used a large language model to help write essays showed weaker neural connectivity than participants who used search engines or no external tools, and often couldn't accurately quote passages from essays they had written minutes earlier.

These two examples, Ming said, are cases of cognitive offloading and surrender, or, as she put it, "delegating the effortful part of a task to an external system so your own networks never have to do it."

Her concern in both cases is that people may be engaging key brain functions less frequently, including the hippocampus, the part of your brain that is responsible for memory and learning, and the prefrontal brain networks that help with attention, self-control, and decision-making.

"The hippocampus and prefrontal networks doing that work are precisely the systems that matter for cognitive aging," she said.

"GPT is the new GPS," she added, referring to OpenAI's chatbot ChatGPT, which she said could erode cognitive skills if people increasingly rely on it to think for them.

A matter of cognitive reserve

Research has consistently linked mentally stimulating activities to higher levels of cognitive reserve and lower dementia risk.

One analysis conducted by the English Longitudinal Study of Ageing (ELSA) in 2020 on 12,280 adults aged 50 and older, found that older people with higher cognitive reserve can expect to have a 35% lower risk of developing dementia compared to those with lower levels.

"The principle that lifelong mental engagement delays cognitive decline is some of the most replicated research we have," Ming said.

Importantly, Ming said no biomarker study linking AI use to dementia pathology has been conducted yet. Most of the data right now is "correlational or short-term," she said.

However, she thinks now is the time to start analyzing this cohort, "while the behavior is still taking shape."

"By the time we have the dementia data, a generation will have already formed the habit," she added.

• Ukraine's fast-moving fight means once-cutting-edge defense tech can quickly lose relevance.
• An official said counter-drone tech no longer ideal for Ukraine could still help allies.
• Partner nations want defenses fast as they prepare for Shahed-style drone threats.

A Ukrainian official said the country's earlier counter-drone technology, even if it's no longer sufficiently cutting-edge for its own fight, could still be useful for partner nations worried about similar threats and searching for good-enough solutions now.

Ukraine is in a constant innovation race with Russia, with both sides trying to rapidly develop drones and counter-drone defenses to beat the other side. Technology that was once key can rapidly become obsolete on the battlefield, yet still be a better option than what many allies have available now to meet the challenge.

Davyd Aloian, the deputy secretary of Ukraine's National Security and Defense Council, said some Ukrainian drone technology, including some early designs for interceptor drones built to shoot down incoming attack drones, may no longer be an ideal solution for Ukraine's needs but could still work elsewhere, where the weapons race is moving more slowly.

In the event of attacks against other countries in Europe, for example, he said "it would be better to have at least the solutions that showed their efficiency months ago."

Aloian's idea aligns with a key lesson NATO nations are learning from the war in Ukraine: having a lot of good-enough weapons available today beats a limited arsenal of perfect ones that come too late.

The deputy secretary said that this dynamic was visible in the Middle East during the Iran war, when the US and its Gulf allies faced attacks by Iran's Shahed drones. Though Tehran used some newer jet-powered one-way attack drones, like Moscow is increasingly deploying, it relied heavily on propeller-driven Shahed designs — the kind that Ukraine had been battling since early in Russia's war.

During the Iran war, Ukraine sent roughly 200 military experts to the Middle East to help nations strengthen their air defenses. It also sent troops and Ukrainian anti-drone solutions, which were used in combat. The fight triggered a sharp increase in interest in interceptor drones.

Aloian said that designs that were a year old and less relevant at home still proved effective in the region.

"We are ready to share our operation, technologies, and experience, and everything that will be needed in order for our partners to achieve the same level of defense deterrence that we have in Ukraine," Aloian said.

A starting place could be gear that Ukraine no longer has use for but could still prove practical for another operator in another kind of fight.

Aloian said it would be useful for allies to have "access to those solutions that are efficient." Even if they're not used in a fight, they could hold value as training tools, he said.

Ukrainian officials have said that Kyiv is willing to send partner nations defense technology, including interceptors, when it can do so without hurting its fight. It is also planning to export some systems, including long-range drones, that are no longer useful on its battlefield but still interest partners.

Aloian said that in the war with Russia, "speed is essential," and the defense industry has to work much faster than what allies are used to. Within months, "solutions will already be outdated."

Ukrainian officials have said that interceptor drone designs can change so quickly that the advantage of a new model may be negated within months. Companies are constantly upgrading platforms while swiftly phasing out obsolete systems. There are possibilities for those systems, though, in regions like the Middle East or elsewhere in Europe.

NATO countries are increasingly concerned about drones, especially after several Russian long-range drone incursions, but they are not under the same immediate pressure as Ukraine, which faces bombardments regularly. Officials have argued that, as they prepare for future drone threats, there is real value in defenses that are available now.

Ukraine has shifted from being a country many expected to be quickly overrun by Russia and urgently seeking help from cautious partners to being a source of new battlefield technology and tactical lessons that many Western militaries now want to study.

Aloian said Ukraine has "the experience, and we have the knowledge, we have the solutions" that it's already sharing "with our, not even partners, but with friends."

• A version of this post appears in the CMO Insider newsletter.
• Sign up for Business Insider's weekly marketing newsletter.

Bose wants a bigger chunk of the music business.

The audio-equipment maker has created Bose Studios, an in-house content studio designed to help it shift from campaign-driven marketing, the company exclusively told CMO Insider.

One key differentiator is the launch of a new record label, Bose Records. Bose CMO Jim Mollica said in an interview that the plan isn't to go toe-to-toe with the "Big Three" label conglomerates, but rather to help break underappreciated or new artists and — crucially — not have to pay for music rights when they feature in Bose commercials. (Mollica said Bose wouldn't look to own the artists' masters, the company wouldn't take a share of their record sales or streams, and that they would be free to sign with other labels.)

Other big projects include commissioning original TV series and films "attached to some legendary Hollywood names," Mollica said. Bose is also planning a YouTube series, podcasts, and live music events — and could perhaps even buy a music media company. Some of those properties will generate their own ad revenue.

The launch of Bose Studios reflects a reality most CMOs face. Ad prices are higher, even though audiences are more fragmented and, in the case of TV, smaller. Consumers are actively avoiding advertising. Social media algorithms and the rise of AI search are disrupting the old ways that brands were discovered. Brands need to entertain to cut through.

"Our category, music, has a bunch of rituals baked into it," Mollica said. "If we have the opportunity, not to sell products, but become part of that ritual, then ultimately Bose is not an audio-equipment business anymore. We're about deepening people's relationship with music."

Much of Bose's prior marketing already focused on forging partnerships with music artists. Last year, for example, it teamed up with Blackpink's LISA to create customized earbuds, which it launched at a pop-up store in Los Angeles. This past February, it collaborated with the Grammy-nominated Twitch streamer PlaqueBoyMax, who created music on the spot during a livestream that aired during the NBA's All-Star weekend.

The record label and film productions signal Bose's expanded ambitions. Other brands, including Red Bull and Starbucks, have launched music labels in the past, though they were eventually retired.

Alexandra Annable, founder of Holl'r Music, an artist management and booking agency, said competition is fiercer than ever for emerging artists. For Bose to succeed, it might want to consider aligning itself with a specific genre, she added, pointing to Wingstop, which created its UK Freestyle Series for emerging drill, rap, and hip-hop artists.

"I think the only way brands can effectively engage with music fans is to create unique, content-led experiences, but these must be really authentic and culturally relevant," Annable said.

Steve Ackerman, a board advisor and consultant to media and entertainment businesses, said Bose Studios needs to ensure the content comes before promoting its products.

"The graveyard of branded content is littered with brands that have gone down this route and not understood what it means to be a content creator," Ackerman said. "They often defaulted to advertising agencies that don't understand how to engage with audiences; they just understand how to create content that gets in the way of the thing that audiences want to engage with."

Mollica, who previously worked at Disney and Viacom, said he understands the assignment. He said Bose Studios is not working with ad agencies and is recruiting and partnering with talent across the film, TV, podcast, and publishing industries.

"This isn't product placement; this isn't a long, 30-minute commercial," Mollica said. "These things are truly about how we are taking this authentic love of music and elevating the content that's out there today for true music fans to experience more."

• Panera Bread CEO Paul Carbone hopes to reverse the chain's slumping sales with a new strategy.
• The effort, named RISE, addresses customer complaints about food value and in-store service quality.
• The chain's latest menu launch, featuring new summer drinks and bowls, builds on the momentum.

As Panera Bread's chief financial officer, Paul Carbone once signed off on a change that looked good on a spreadsheet.

The chain swapped its salad base from 100% romaine lettuce to a mix of romaine and iceberg in the summer of 2024, a move he said was intended to save money.

Now, as CEO, Carbone says Panera is trying to undo that kind of thinking.

"No one really likes iceberg lettuce," Carbone told Business Insider. "No one looks at that white salad and says, 'Now that's worth it.'"

For Carbone, the lettuce decision — which was fully reversed in June 2025, shortly after he became chief executive — has become shorthand for a broader problem at Panera: Years of small cost-cutting moves, menu changes, and operational tweaks chipped away at the experience customers remembered loving.

Panera is now rolling out a summer launch tied to its broader "RISE" transformation strategy, an acronym for the steps of the turnaround effort, which stands for "refresh the menu," “ignite value," "serve guests with excellence," and "expand the network."

The latest evidence of that effort arrives this week in the form of new shrimp-topped bowls, upgraded salads, bacon-and-cheese breakfast frittatas, frozen coffees, and fruit-forward beverages — a menu overhaul intended to remind customers why they fell in love with Panera in the first place.

Carbone said Panera began developing the strategy last year after multiple years of negative same-store transactions. Sales sometimes rose, he said, but that growth was driven by pricing and mix, not by more customers coming in.

"The lifeblood of a restaurant company is transactions," he said. "So that's where we started to develop Panera RISE."

At its core, RISE is Panera's attempt to fix the complaints customers raised most often: food that no longer felt worth the price, fewer affordable options, weaker in-store service, and growing competition for diners' attention. The company spent months talking with thousands of customers to determine its areas of focus.

Carbone said many still had warm feelings toward Panera, but had stopped visiting because the chain had gotten too expensive, removed favorite menu items, or simply fallen out of their routines.

That's a tough place to be in a restaurant market where consumers have become increasingly selective. Business Insider has previously reported that diners are splitting along income lines, with lower-income consumers cutting back while wealthier households keep spending. Restaurants have responded with discounts and limited-time offers to improve value messaging, but analysts have warned that value alone is not always enough to bring customers back.

Panera's own traffic remains under intense pressure. Foot traffic has declined year over year every month from January through May this year, according to data from the foot traffic firm, Placer.ai.

R.J. Hottovy, Placer.ai's head of analytical research, said sandwich chains in particular have seen fewer visits than other concepts as consumers push back on menu price increases and embrace healthier eating habits.

Carbone's diagnosis goes beyond food. Panera also cut labor at cafés to cut costs, he said. The company has since added a front-of-house role, the Guest Experience Champion, to greet customers, answer questions, and help maintain dining rooms.

It is also rethinking how technology fits into the business.

"There was a time that if you talked to folks here, they would tell you that we were a technology company that sold food," Carbone said. "I will tell you emphatically, we are a restaurant company that uses technology to enhance the guest experience. We're not a technology company."

That does not mean abandoning digital ordering, kiosks, or loyalty tools. Only about a quarter of Panera's business is now eaten inside its cafés, Carbone said, but two-thirds of customers still walk into a restaurant, whether they are dining in, picking up, or ordering to go.

That means the in-store experience still matters.

Under RISE, Panera is adding new menu items and drinks, but the bigger bet is that customers will notice when the chain starts optimizing for experience again, not just efficiency.

Carbone said Panera's priorities now are simple: "Transactions, sales, profits — in that order."

After years of trying to drive growth through price cuts and efficiency, Panera is betting that getting more customers through the door again will take something simpler: giving them a reason to come back.

• Allbirds has been rebranded as Smartbird. Instead of selling shoes, it's an AI infrastructure provider.
• Nadia Carlsten, the new CEO, spoke exclusively to Business Insider about her plans.
• She wants to build custom, single-tenant AI infrastructure for mid-market enterprises.

A few years ago, Allbirds was Silicon Valley's favorite sneaker company. Now it's betting its future on AI infrastructure.

After selling off its footwear business and shedding most of its workforce, the company formerly known for its eco-friendly wool sneakers has reinvented itself as Smartbird, an AI infrastructure provider led by a CEO who has never worn its signature shoes.

The transformation is one of the most dramatic pivots of the AI boom and a test of whether a struggling public consumer company can transition into an AI company.

"I'm more of a high heels person myself," Nadia Carlsten told Business Insider in an exclusive interview. "I'm blissfully unaware of all things Allbirds."

For those unaware, Allbirds launched in 2015 and quickly became one of tech's hottest consumer brands, with its sneakers as much a part of the Silicon Valley uniform as hoodies and Patagonia vests.

After going public in 2021, Allbirds was worth nearly $4 billion. But the brand's cool factor faded almost as quickly as it arrived. By early 2025, Allbirds' market value had fallen below $20 million.

Then, in April, the company announced an only-in-2026 pivot: It would no longer sell shoes and instead become an AI infrastructure provider, going head-to-head with the likes of Amazon, CoreWeave, and Crusoe.

Some ridiculed the move as "bizarre," or even "ridiculous and concerning." Wall Street was more enthusiastic, with the stock briefly soaring 800% on the news, though it has since lost much of its gains.

The transformation became official on Wednesday as the company said that it has completed the sale of the Allbirds brand and footwear assets, changed its legal name to Smartbird, and appointed Carlsten as president and CEO. She replaces Joe Vernachio, who is resigning from the company and the board of directors.

Carlsten was previously CEO of the Danish Centre for AI Innovation. She also managed product portfolios at SandboxAQ and launched the quantum computing service at Amazon Web Services.

With nearly the entire company's staff gone, Carlsten is starting from scratch, except for the same BIRD ticker symbol that trades on the NASDAQ.

Business Insider spoke with Carlsten about her plans. This interview has been edited and condensed for clarity.

BI: Did you ever imagine you would be working at Allbirds, and it would not be a shoe company, but an AI infrastructure play?

Carlsten: I've been around the block in Silicon Valley. It's not that unusual. Slack started as a game. Twitter started as a podcast. SpaceX started as a rocket company and is now doing AI infrastructure. So there's precedent for some of this.

Everybody's trying to be in the AI infrastructure space. This is probably not the most typical way to get into it, but we have a really good plan and strategy.

In a few months, people won't even remember the shoes.

BI: What does the company you're taking over look like at this stage?

Carlsten: The important thing to remember is that the shoe business has been sold, so anybody who was dedicated to the retail business is no longer part of the company. My first task is to hire the team. This is a brand-new company with brand-new people.

BI: Why not just start a new company?

Carlsten: In many ways, it is like a startup. I'm going to be growing a team, developing a new business model, approaching customers, and growing a pipeline of customers.

There are also some advantages to being a public company. One of them is access to capital. We have an easier time as we're looking at acquisitions and partnering with others in the industry. The liquidity makes it a lot easier to recruit.

In AI, speed is key. So why would you want to do things more slowly if you can do it faster?

BI: You're also now running a public company from day one, which brings a lot of scrutiny. Are you worried about that?

Carlsten: AI fluctuates, whether it's public or private. This is a business that is never static. AI is moving incredibly fast.

Customers are demanding things very differently than they were just a couple of months ago. So I don't think that makes much of a difference in how we will build the business.

BI: What exactly is Smartbird going to do?

Carlsten: We are an AI infrastructure company, and what makes us different is that we are focusing on the mid-market, such as enterprises that are in the pharma space or financial services space, and also countries that are interested in sovereign AI or having regional AI infrastructure accessible to them.

All of these players are doing more AI. They have more needs for persistent AI infrastructure, but at the same time, for whatever reason, they cannot use or won't use the public clouds. They are very interested in making sure their proprietary data does not enter a shared multi-tenant infrastructure system.

Right now, their choices are either shared infrastructure or building their own. And most of the people that I talk to in this space want to do more AI, but that doesn't mean that they want to build that AI infrastructure. Right now, they're doing it because they have to.

BI: You're going up against Amazon, Google, CoreWeave, and a lot of other established players. How do you plan to compete?

Carlsten: We're not competing head-on with hyperscalers like AWS or Azure or even large neoclouds like CoreWeave. Those guys are very good at building massive-scale shared infrastructure, which is the opposite of what we want to be doing.

We will focus on customers who need AI infrastructure at a smaller scale. Usually, they want single-tenant infrastructure, something that looks like a GPU cluster that they own and can fully control without having the disadvantages of managing the stack themselves.

BI: Where are you getting the GPUs from?

Carlsten: We'll be sourcing from multiple vendors. One of the things we'll be offering customers is the flexibility to build something specifically for their requirements.

BI: Are you going to buy the infrastructure or lease it?

Carlsten: We will purchase the infrastructure and build it out on behalf of the customer. We're not building ahead of demand. We are building something for specific customers.

We can be a lot more agile than the bigger players.

• As Americans use AI more they're trusting AI companies less, recent Morning Consult surveys show.
• At the same time, the popularity of nostalgic products like Lunchables and Capri-Sun is rising.
• The trend suggests consumers want the comfort of familiar brands in uncertain times.

The faster things change, the more we gravitate toward things that stay the same.

It's no secret that AI is disrupting many aspects of modern life, but recent survey data shows that the more people use the tech, the less they trust it.

The latest numbers from market research firm Morning Consult, released Tuesday, found that AI was one of the least trusted categories among US consumers, with seven out of 10 major AI brands seeing year-over-year declines in their net trust scores.

Google's Gemini managed to buck the trend and improve its score by six points to lead the pack with a net trust score of 24.

At the same time, some of the brands that saw the greatest improvement in consumer trust scores were decidedly low-tech and high-nostalgia: Capri-Sun, Lunchables, Hot Wheels, and Mr. Pibb.

"What unites them is that they belong to a specific register of American memory: the brand landscape of childhood, before adult complexity set in," Morning Consult said in the report.

The company has tracked trust scores for nearly 600 brands since 2018 and found that Americans' overall trust in consumer brands is higher than ever in spite of, well, everything.

Other high-ranking brands — Dawn dish soap, Band-Aid wound care, Heinz ketchup — are "reliable if not particularly exciting" and have "eliminated surprise from the consumer relationship," the report said.

The report also highlighted Gap's return to popularity, which it attributed to a heavy adoption of Y2K aesthetics, harkening back to a comparatively less complicated (or at least slower-moving) era.

Americans' fondness for decades-old standbys stands in stark contrast to their feelings about AI companies, many of which are evolving with head-spinning speed and driving eye-watering financial valuations.

A more detailed Morning Consult report on AI published in May found that more than a third of survey respondents do not trust AI "at all" — roughly matching the share of people who have a positive view of the tech.

Among ten of the leading companies, Meta AI, Perplexity AI, and xAI saw the sharpest declines in overall trust ratings since last year. One in five respondents agreed with the statement that AI companies' products present "a real risk" of ending human civilization.

"In 2026, a significant portion of consumers are in anchoring mode: seeking brands they can count on when other parts of their environment feel unstable," Morning Consult said.

Pylon CEO Marty Kausas had to make a difficult choice: scale back token spending, or stomach a $1.4 million bill.

Kausas said that his AI software company was fast approaching 150 employees on its Anthropic plan earlier this month, a point where the bill would more than triple. That realization got Kausas to declare the era of unlimited spending over — and he decided to set ceilings for tokens, the units of data that determine how AI is priced, for some of his non-technical employees.

Pylon's VP of finance is now exploring "where we should set caps," Kausas said. "This is just the start."

Leaders like Kausas are weathering a massive workplace shift, as more workers learn to love improved AI tools. Over the past few months, usage has moved from something bosses felt they had to incentivize to something they had to limit, due to skyrocketing costs and the realization that unlimited spending didn't always yield meaningful results.

OpenAI CEO Sam Altman said earlier this month he was blown away by how fast the conversation around AI budgets had changed. At the beginning of the year, "people were totally happy with the amount they were spending," he said. Now, these costs are "a huge issue."

It's not just CEOs and CFOs navigating these new corporate dynamics. For rank-and-file software engineers, part of their job now involves advocating for the compute they need to succeed. Meanwhile, some managers have to barter for their team's tokens, pitching like "Shark Tank." And, to poach red-hot AI talent, hiring managers are guaranteeing candidates tokens to spend.

A cutthroat Hunger Games for AI compute is fast approaching, one where everyone — from the C-suite to junior developers — is a player.

Token-fever whiplash

Max Kan's official job title is "tokenomics analyst."

At the data provider SemiAnalysis, Kan helps build token models for hedge funds and hyperscalers. When I called Kan in May, he was bullish on the impact that deep token budgets could have on the workforce. "It's basically true for everyone that, if you have an employee that's making $100,000 a year, you can probably make them 2x more productive with $10,000 worth of tokens," he said.

Those were the days of tokenmaxxing, when companies sent their engineers diving into token pools like Scrooge McDuck. Companies encouraged token leaderboards, where those at the bottom of the rankings felt pressure to use more AI, and executives across a range of industries couldn't stop talking about it.

The word "tokens" was used in 129 earnings calls in Q2 of 2026, up from 57 calls the prior quarter, according to an analysis performed for Business Insider by business intelligence platform AlphaSense.

Within a matter of weeks, the belt-tightening began. Companies began putting AI budgets on a diet and setting token limits. Coinbase set a cap; so did Walmart. Amazon shut down its internal token leaderboard.

Kan still advocates for big per-engineer allowances — and wonders what workers will think of the rapid discourse shift. He worried that engineers would think: "My boss is adamantly pushing me to do one thing, then I did that thing, and now I'm getting yelled at because I did that thing too well."

"I would definitely feel confused and angry if I were an engineer in those positions," he said.

Leaders across industries — from financial giants like JPMorgan to media conglomerates like Disney — are working to develop cohesive, effective AI policies.

Some firms have always been anti-tokenmaxxing. The enterprise software company Pega is one of them. When I hopped on the phone in May with its CFO and COO, Ken Stillwell, he called the trend an "incredibly self-serving" narrative by the AI companies. His company didn't set numerical token caps, but it did throttle requests that would spend in excess.

When we spoke a month later, as the discourse shifted, Stillwell felt vindicated. "We're quite happy that we're one of many talking about this," he said.

AI spending also continues to soar

Technology and media companies spent an average of $66.29 per employee on AI in May, up from $58.84 in April, according to Ramp's AI Index.

Ara Kharazian, its lead economist, told Business Insider he expected this metric to keep rising, but he spotted early signs of tightening, such as increased use of model routers, which can help better manage costs.

Some companies aren't cutting AI budgets just yet, but they are thinking critically about head count. For instance, MindFort, a Y Combinator-backed AI startup, has six employees. Its CEO, Brandon Veiseh, said the company would've needed 20 employees pre-AI to reach its current scale. Where have those funds gone? Tokens.

"We have to weigh our token-to-people ratio," Veiseh said. "It's not something we think is particularly comfortable or a great feeling to say."

Even though token costs are expected to come down as AI companies like Google increasingly compete on price by offering smaller, more efficient models, these sorts of tradeoffs aren't likely to go away. Often, the cheaper a resource is, the more of it is consumed.

For now, companies are thinking more critically and sometimes taking strategic steps back — but they're hesitant to move too quickly. Kausas, Pylon's CEO, said he wants to prioritize making sure there's a return on investment — and avoid engineer backlash.

"If we told engineers that they were not allowed to use AI products, they would not work here," he said. "It would feel like you were in the Stone Age."

Dawn of the token Hunger Games?

As engineers increasingly learn they might have to battle for their token allocation, team infighting could grow.

Some have compared this to a survival-of-the-fittest scenario. "Coding is now cockroach protein bars and we're all fighting for crumbs," said one coder on X, comparing the dynamic to "The Hunger Games."

Developers are also asking more about tokens during job interviews. Kausas said that applicants had asked him about budgets. AI advisor and AWS alum Allie K. Miller had heard of interviewees getting into the nitty-gritty: "What tier of model will I have access to? Do you have partnerships with AI labs that get us relatively early access?"

It's a sign of a new era where tokens — or at least the number workers want — aren't guaranteed.

Max Christoff, the CTO of legal tech company Everlaw, made the case for giving engineers token caps, but letting them negotiate for bigger budgets. He compared it to using cellular data before unlimited plans. Sometimes you need to spend big on the data, but other times you mindlessly scroll, not realizing how much you're wasting. Christoff wanted all of the former and none of the latter.

"We want to make it easy to ask for more if you can actually use it," Christoff said.

If a company doesn't set token caps, it may also set model restrictions. Russ Fradin, the founder of Larridin, a platform for tracking AI use, was emphatic. "Of course, they will limit who gets to use these tools. It's not even a question," he said.

Fradin compared allocating model access to taking a trip on the company dime. Many are allowed to book an economy flight, but few — if any — are allowed to charter a jet, he said. Access to cutting-edge AI models may be equivalent to the private jet: so expensive that only a few all-stars can do it.

Engineers have good reason to fight for their tokens. Having limited AI access could hurt them in the long run, leaving them less skilled or less marketable in future job searches.

Brock Simon advised companies on AI for Bain & Company before he founded his own startup, Native. He watched as some companies were slow to adopt the technology or restricted access to specific tools and agents, leaving their employees behind the curve.

"It really hurt some people's careers," he said.

• Billions of dollars are riding on the promise that artificial intelligence can absorb legal work.
• Crosby, a tech-driven law firm, built a benchmark to measure how well models negotiate contracts.
• Redline Bench is meant to help lawyers answer whether they can trust the technology's work.

Legal technology wants its vibe-coding moment. But first, it has to prove the tools can think like a lawyer.

Taking up the task is Crosby, a startup-meets-law-firm that sells basic legal services to companies, including Cursor and Rogo. On Wednesday, it released the Redline Bench, a tool built to measure how well artificial intelligence models perform real-world legal tasks, starting with contract review.

Software engineers have spent the past few years watching these systems get shockingly good at writing code and debugging errors. Now legal tech companies are chasing a similar prize: artificial intelligence that can review contracts, spot risks, and haggle terms faster and cheaper than lawyers.

But law has a problem that coding does not, says Ryan Daniels, a former in-house lawyer turned Crosby founder. "It's really hard to define 'good' or 'bad,'" he said.

Models can write code that either runs or breaks. Legal work is a murkier target. A sales contract can be edited, or "redlined," in lots of defensible ways, Daniels explains. A change that one lawyer sees as prudent, another might call too aggressive.

That ambiguity has become a headache for companies racing to automate legal work, from the scrappy neofirms to the model labs themselves. Anthropic has spent the past few months courting in-house lawyers with tools built for them. That push has been closely watched by investors. Earlier this year, Anthropic's new legal plugin stirred a sell-off in legal tech stocks.

Benchmarks are one of the main ways companies track progress. The labs building frontier models use them as stress tests, measuring whether a new system is better at tasks than the last one.

Coding has hundreds of benchmarks for evaluating models. But the legal industry still lacks a shared way to answer the question: Is the AI's work any good?

Crosby has been working on a new yardstick. The company pulled its engineers and lawyers into a tactical unit called Crosby Intelligence to build agents for Crosby's law firm and a benchmark to grade them against. That team includes engineer Sharan Ramjee, who worked on transformer models to sniff out fraud at Stripe, and Ross Weiser, a lawyer who joined from elite law firm Sullivan & Cromwell.

Crosby also partnered with Micro1, a company that helps model-makers recruit expert workers, to find more lawyers who could help define what counts as good legal work.

To build the benchmark, senior lawyers simulated software deals and marked the contract changes they considered most important at each stage of the negotiation. Those changes were turned into weighted criteria.

When Crosby runs a new test, it gives models the same contracts and asks them to make their own edits. Then a panel of three judges compares these redlines with the lawyer-built rubric. The judges vote pass or fail on each item, and the final score shows how often the models made the kinds of edits that lawyers considered important.

Redline Bench will be made public so any lab can put its models through Crosby's paces. Crosby also plans to regularly release reports tracking how major models compare.

The first release of the Redline Bench put ChatGPT 5.5 at the top of the heap, with a score of 50.5%, meaning the model's redlines matched half of the edits that lawyers prioritized. Gemini 3.5 Flash followed at 45.1%, and Claude Opus 4.8 scored 44.4%.

Crosby was able to test Anthropic's highly capable new model, Fable 5, only once before Anthropic pulled it off the shelves. The results were promising, with a score of 47.3%. When access is restored, Crosby will run the benchmark again and update it.

Crosby isn't the only company trying to measure how the models stack up. Harvey, one of the best-funded legal startups, has released benchmarks for case law research and contract review.

Anthropic and OpenAI also build their own benchmarks to measure performance on real-world tasks. But Daniels said those results can be hard to trust. Over time, the labs eventually tune their systems to perform well on their own tests, he said.

The stakes are bigger than a scoreboard. Billions of investment dollars are riding on the promise that artificial intelligence can lower legal bills and absorb work that used to pile up on the general counsel's desk.

Lawyers will only use the tools if they trust them. Crosby wants to give them a reason to.

• Ukrainian troops on the front lines can earn up to $10,270 a month based on how much they fight.
• That's nearly 30 times the average salary in the country.
• The bonuses are part of a new push to overhaul Ukraine's pay and contract system.

Ukraine is implementing a new bonus system that rewards frontline troops with cash for feats in battle or carrying out combat missions.

The incentives are part of a salary and contract overhaul announced on June 12, after years of Kyiv struggling with recruitment and reports of absence without leave, or AWOL.

The defense ministry said on Tuesday that the new system would apply to combat missions or tasks from the start of June, with payouts to be received in July.

The highest bonuses vary based on performance, and primarily apply to troops in the most dangerous roles, such as assault infantry, combat medics, and gunners. Each frontline soldier gets a base monthly pay of 20,000 hryvnias, or $446, but could earn up to 460,000 hryvnias, or $10,270, a month based on their service.

The full payout would be nearly 30 times the average salary in Ukraine before the war began; government statistics from January 2022 said the country's average monthly salary was 14,577 hryvnias.

A day at a Ukrainian-held position earns the soldier another 10,000 hryvnias, while each day carrying out more aggressive missions, such as reconnaissance, evacuation, or recapturing friendly territory, nets them 20,000 instead.

The biggest daily bonus is 40,000 hryvnias for each day spent in assault operations that result in a Ukrainian advance. The bonuses don't stack, so a soldier can only earn one per day — whichever is highest.

Then there are bonuses for taking a Russian soldier prisoner, which is 100,000 hryvnias split among all troops involved directly in the capture, and destroying an enemy asset or killing a Russian soldier, which is worth 15,000 hryvnias.

Commanders and their teams can earn an extra 30,000 hryvnias a month for performing combat tasks, and 50,000 hryvnias for running operations from command posts, depending on the time they spent on missions that month.

The grand total of these payments is capped at 460,000 a month, the Ukrainian defense ministry said.

While stationed temporarily in rear areas, troops instead receive a minimum monthly pay of 30,000 hryvnias. Ukrainian soldiers regularly rotate between fighting near or at the front lines and resting in safer towns and strongholds.

Drone pilots' and specialists' salaries are different, with a scale that pays more the closer they are to the front lines, up to a maximum of 120,000 hryvnias. They can also get bonuses of up to 100,000 hryvnias for participating in combat or performing command roles.

The defense ministry said it was also implementing a new system that allows troops who have gone AWOL to return to the military under the best-rated units and immediately receive gear, meals, and clothing.

The measure seeks to fix a loophole that led dissatisfied Ukrainian troops to avoid the bureaucracy of applying for transfers and force a move by going AWOL.

Ukraine's defense ministry has embarked on an aggressive overhaul since January under Mykhailo Fedorov, who was appointed to lead the ministry after a stint as the country's minister for digital transformation.

The 35-year-old has pledged to address many of the systemic issues and gripes that have plagued Ukraine's forces for years, including low morale and lack of command transparency.

"This is only the first stage of the comprehensive transformation of the Defense Forces of Ukraine," the ministry said on June 12.

• UK-based business owner Sean McDonnell relies on AI for his web design business and SaaS website.
• The White House ordered Anthropic to cut foreign access to Fable 5 while McDonell was mid-task.
• McDonnell emphasizes importance of backup plans due to AI tool disruptions like the Fable incident.

This as-told-to essay is based on a conversation with Sean McDonnell, 43, who lives in England. McDonnell is the founder of the web design company Kaizen and the SaaS website Consigns. The following has been edited for length and clarity.

Developing my website would not have been possible without AI.

I started my web design business earlier this year, which also led me to create a website that provides software to help companies track their waste. I run both of these ventures with my partner, and we enlist contractors for some operations and software development.

We're a small team, and AI tools are a big help. Last week, I saw a few posts online showing the amazing things that Anthropic's new Fable model can do.

I was keen to try this new technology, but didn't get much of a chance to use it. A few hours in, I was mid-task when the US government forced Anthropic to cut off foreign access to Fable with little to no notice.

The rug got pulled from under me pretty quickly, but because I was well-prepared, it didn't have a hugely disruptive impact on my business. It's a reminder that you can't rely too heavily on AI as a founder, and you should always have a backup plan in case of unforeseen circumstances.

I was keen to give Fable a try, but it was short-lived

I like using OpenAI's Codex for repetitive, code-intensive work, and Claude for tasks that help design the product's aesthetics. AI has been able to completely change the architecture of our codebase in a day, whereas a task like that would've taken a developer weeks to do manually.

After seeing so much about it online, I wanted to use Fable to conduct a full review of our product for safety and security flags. The model was in the middle of making some key changes to our codebase when it got shut off instantly with a notice saying, "Claude Fable 5 is currently unavailable."

I didn't realize until the next day that this had happened because the US government ordered Anthropic to block foreign access to the model. It's been a bit of a bummer, and I feel bad for the people at Anthropic for making a brilliant product and having the rug pulled from under them, too. I'm also quite annoyed we didn't get to do more with Fable. I think it could've propelled us so much further.

Being prepared helped us avoid a huge disruption

This isn't the first time we've had issues with using Claude. In the past, when we used Opus 4.6, it would stop mid-task because it hit the token limit so quickly. We didn't realize how token-heavy the tool was, and it left our codebase in a bit of a mess.

Because we'd learned this lesson with 4.6, we made sure we were more prepared for unforeseen circumstances with using AI.

When we started our product review last week, I asked Fable to create a guide that both Claude or other AI models could follow. This enabled us to pass the remaining tasks to other agents when we lost access to Fable. We passed some to Codex and others to Claude 4.8. If we hadn't been prepared this way, the Fable issue could've resulted in lots of work being out the window.

Fable getting pulled didn't have a major impact because we were ready for it, but it ruined our momentum. We're working on a deadline, and every minute counts, so delays like this can be quite disruptive.

Always have a plan B

This Anthropic incident has solidified my conviction that you can't depend completely on AI.

If the government were to shut off AI access completely, our business wouldn't end, because we've already built out our platform, but we are quite dependent on AI. A situation like that would likely increase our costs, partly because we'd have to switch to the old-school method of hiring developers.

In today's AI era, it's important to always have a plan B. Don't just rely on one AI tool. It's good to understand the strengths of different models.

Make sure you're documenting things as you go by keeping records that exist outside your AI tool. If Claude knows all about our code base, but it gets pulled tomorrow, would I be able to give that over to a developer? At this stage, I think I could, because I've been documenting everything as I go. It's a fail-safe.

A spokesperson from The White House told Business Insider, "The Trump administration is collaborating with AI industry leaders to balance cutting-edge innovation with national security concerns that affect both the United States and our allies."

Anthropic did not immediately respond to requests for comment.

Do you have a similar story to share? If so, you can reach out to one of the reporters at aapplegate@businessinsider.com and ccheong@businessinsider.com.

Last June, fashion models for the fashion retailer Rainbow received a warning: AI was ramping up, and the number of workers needed would be ramping down.

"You may have already seen some changes taking place both within the studio and on the site," wrote Rainbow's studio manager, Phil Caraway. The company had started "styling certain products, and generating avatars, with the assistance of A.I," he explained, and while he couldn't say for certain whether any freelancers would lose their jobs, he wanted them to "plan accordingly."

"Fewer people will be needed in the long term," Caraway wrote in the previously unreported email. "It is very likely that this Fall will see a huge increase in A.I. use."

Thus began what several models described as a year of anxiety and, later, anger. They could see the company using AI to create synthetic models within view of where they worked, the models told Business Insider. At the same time, the models' days in the New York office began to dwindle, they said, leaving many without work. Nearly a year after that June email, Rainbow has begun rehiring some models — though many remain out of work.

In March of this year, the models began noticing Rainbow marketing images that looked like them, but posed in positions or locations that differed from the photo shoots they had participated in. Many suspected the doppelgängers were the result of AI. The lookalike models cropped up across Rainbow's site, social media, and newsletters. A flurry of emails to Rainbow followed, along with a lawsuit by one model.

As AI technologies improve, workplaces across the country are experimenting with how to use them — and navigating the thorny question of their impact on human jobs. Creative industries like modeling are especially exposed as AI-generated photos and videos improve in quality.

AI is growing more common within the fashion industry. In a 2025 study from the Worker Institute at Cornell University ILR School and Data & Society in partnership with the Model Alliance, researchers said that e-commerce gigs were "more vulnerable to displacement by AI technologies."

Business Insider spoke to multiple Rainbow employees and contractors, all of whom requested anonymity, and also reviewed dozens of email exchanges and images, as well as modeling contracts.

"Rainbow is responsibly evaluating emerging AI technologies in the marketplace, and has and is committed to doing so in a proper manner," David Cost, Rainbow's chief digital officer, wrote in a statement to Business Insider.

In a follow-up email, Cost wrote that "Rainbow's dealings with its employees and independent contractors are private" and that the company disagreed with "much of the purported 'facts.'" He declined to comment on specific questions sent by Business Insider. "Rainbow has acted appropriately and in accordance with its commitments, including contracts signed by models," he added.

Here's how Rainbow's AI model experiment got messy, according to its workers — from a slowdown on human modeling work to contract disputes and hiring some of the models back.

Rainbow, founded in Brooklyn over 90 years ago, has over 800 stores nationwide and is privately owned. The retailer caters to thrifty consumers with steep discounts, similar to Fashion Nova or PrettyLittleThing. It also operates the similar brand KissDon'tTell.

For its e-commerce shoots, the Rainbow team looked for models without agency connections, one former stylist who helped recruit models said. Two models said that they were found on Instagram and had little paid modeling experience. Fees varied by model, though many said they made around $50 an hour.

Three models said that one Rainbow employee told them to be available for five days of work a week. The former stylist said that Rainbow asked its freelancers to be available Monday through Friday, but that it wasn't written into their contracts. Two models said they left their prior jobs for the company.

Partway through 2025, the models began to notice something different in the studio: AI training. Employees would lay out the clothes on a flat board, take photos, and upload them to an AI program called Lica, one employee said. Lica generated fully synthetic AI models — not duplicates of human models — for Rainbow, the employee said.

The AI training caused significant anxiety among the models, they said. Trying to lighten the mood, some models said they would crack dark jokes about the system replacing them. Two models said that they recalled instances where the fit of a garment on their body was compared to an AI avatar, pointing out where the avatar needed to be more realistic.

After Carraway's June email a year ago, the models braced for their work to drop off. For months, several models said that they continued to get consistent bookings. Then, they slowed down, the models said, and by mid-March of this year, the work dried up. Some models submitted their availability but said they received no response.

During that period, two Rainbow employees who are not models said that they went weeks without seeing any human models in the studio.

Meanwhile, the models started spotting their doppelgängers on Rainbow's social media.

The models had previously participated in product shots wearing Rainbow apparel, such as a long floral dress, while photographed in front of plain backgrounds.

The doppelgängers they later noticed looked strikingly similar — the same builds, facial features, and outfits they had worn — but were pictured with their bodies in entirely different positions. The models texted these images back and forth in a group chat. Business Insider viewed over a dozen such images.

The second clause of the contracts many of the models had signed allowed Rainbow to use their images "whether intact or in part, composite or distorted in character or form, cropped or altered, without restrictions as to changes or transformations."

One image that sparked conversation in the group chat showed what the models suspected was an AI lookalike that altered the model's original skin tone. The model and the suspected AI lookalike had some similarities — the hairstyle and placement of the hair part, as well as the accessories and shoes — but also some differences, such as the nose shape.

None of the employees Business Insider spoke to had directly seen the creation or editing of these doppelgängers.

Several of the models who suspected that Rainbow was modifying their likenesses with AI raised issues with the company via email.

One of the models, Francheska Pujols, sued Rainbow on May 22, alleging the images defamed her and caused confusion over her endorsement of the company's products, among other allegations.

Pujols wrote in an affidavit that her contract only covered images captured in photo shoots, and "does not in any way authorize the creation of entirely new images, scenes, poses, or compositions that did not exist in the original content."

Rainbow posted photos of what Pujols said is her AI doppelgänger; in one, she straddles a barstool. Another shows her seated, wearing a short skirt, with one leg raised.

Pujols wrote to Business Insider that she would "never pose with my legs open or position myself in a sexualized manner for the world to see."

"I am extremely emotional and have many sleepless nights with the thought of the altered images of me," Pujols wrote. "I sought a professional aide to help with sleep and reconciliation."

Pujols withdrew her suit on May 29 to pursue a private settlement, her attorney wrote in an affidavit. She refiled the lawsuit on Monday.

"As Rainbow has stated previously in relation to this matter, Ms. Pujols' images were used properly and in accordance with the agreement she signed," Joan McGillycuddy, Rainbow's chief legal officer, wrote in a statement to Business Insider. "There is no violation of her rights."

Rainbow's contracts said the models would receive double their day rate for image use outside that second clause. Some models requested compensation for the suspected AI images but were turned down, according to their messages, which were viewed by Business Insider.

Then, the contract back-and-forth began.

On March 10, amid the work slowdown, Caraway sent an email to the models. "To account for today's rapidly-changing technology and expectations of use, Rainbow has come up with an updated Model Release," Caraway wrote.

One clause in the new contract was particularly controversial — one that the models interpreted as granting Rainbow sweeping AI rights.

The new clause allowed Rainbow to use "various technologies, tools, or production methods now known or later developed, including automated or computer-assisted techniques." The clause should be interpreted "broadly" as long as the company was not "materially misrepresenting the model," the contract read.

Some of the models said they refused to sign it. On March 28, Carraway emailed the models that Rainbow agreed to remove a non-compete clause, but the technology usage clause was presented as a dealbreaker.

"Rainbow cannot adjust the AI clause," Caraway wrote. "In order to continue to be hired, this must be agreed to."

It's not clear if the contract negotiations contributed to or prolonged the work slowdown.

Cost, Rainbow's CDO, hyped up the AI program Lica in an April video reposted by the startup's cofounder.

"It's amazing what the people at Lica have been able to do," he said. "We're using them for product photography. We're also using them for editorial or things that you'd see on a homepage or in an email."

Two staffers said the tool was buggy. Some of the synthetic models' legs were too short, one said; the AI repeatedly generated one synthetic model with a white cardigan over her clothes. Creating an AI image would also take long stretches of re-prompting, they said, often around 15-30 minutes.

Rainbow is no longer using Lica, one staffer said. Lica told Business Insider in a statement that it is "focused on foundational AI research for multimodal design models."

"As part of our research efforts, we provided interested enterprise partners with early access to emerging AI capabilities and model technologies," a Lica representative wrote. "We do not direct, supervise, or control our customers' implementation decisions, and we do not publicly comment on specific customer use cases."

Rainbow began bringing some of its human models back at the end of April, employees said.

This time around, some of the models received an agreement with the following clause: "Company will not create digital replicas, train AI on Model likeness, or generate synthetic images not based on original Content."

Rainbow is still producing images of the AI avatars, one staffer said, but not with Lica.

Cost, the company's chief digital officer, referenced the state of AI experimentation at Rainbow in his LinkedIn job description.

"Every experiment designed to replace a person with AI failed," Cost wrote. "Every experiment designed to give a talented person more capability won, and won bigger than expected."

After pummelling his opponent in a bout sponsored by Truth Social on the White House South Lawn last Sunday, UFC fighter Josh Hokut extolled President Donald Trump for "having the balls to put some shit like this on."

Over 4,000 people watched Hokut and 13 others duke it out at UFC Freedom 250, a $60 million production celebrating America's 250th anniversary and Donald Trump's 80th birthday. Onlookers sat under the Claw, a 92-foot-tall, 600-ton steel arch and encircled the octagon festooned with logos for the event's sponsors: Monster Energy, Meta, Starlink, Polymarket, and the Saudi entertainment festival Riyadh Season. (After a few rounds of fights, the signage for munitions manufacturer Anduril Industries was appropriately splattered with blood.)

Seated closest to the action was the first family and Trump's nearest and dearest — donors who had given at least $1 million; David Ellison, whose Paramount+ streamed the fight exclusively; and technocrats such as Meta's Mark Zuckerberg and venture capitalist Marc Andreessen. Military servicemembers helped fill the stands, too, though troops on TV "MUST MEET CURRENT WAIST-HEIGHT RATIO," according to a memo reported by the Washington Post. The administration's message: only those sufficiently jacked can attend the state-sponsored cage match.

The White House touted the fight, originally scheduled for July 4, as "one of the greatest and most historic sporting events in history." It was a semiotician's fever dream — a branded, chest-thumping caricature of American carnage, carnivalism, and capitalism. For some fighters, paid in stablecoins from Trump family-backed World Liberty Financial, and for fans, paid in jumbotron bloodshed and Bud Light-backed brotherhood, there was also an American berserk form of catharsis.

"There's only one person more incredible than the Incredible Hok, and that's my lord and savior Jesus Christ," Hokut continued in his victory speech. Then he said he was going to have sex with another fighter's mom. "Lastly, Michelle Obama is a man."

A few hundred yards away on the Ellipse, along with 85,000 gathered for the Fan Fest watch party, I couldn't hear Hokut's last line ("Am I right, America?") over the cheers.

By then, the crowd had been reveling in the humidity and the José Cuervo for more than seven hours.

They paraded in at 3:00 p.m., wearing Uncle Sam hats, rhinestoned minidresses, and t-shirts sporting their favorite fighters and slogans like "I'm Voting for a Convicted Criminal," "I'm Just Here for the Wieners," and "I ❤️ Hot Moms."

Men — many of whom were shirtless, as if they were ready to spinkick anyone who cut them in the energy drink line — outnumbered women at least five to one. One standing by the Boy Scouts Memorial fountain bit into a dumpling and smiled as pork juice squirted onto his chest. "Freedom!" he said. Some did pushups on the lawn to get a pump before posing for a picture at the Total Wireless Weigh-In fan experience. (At the actual weigh-in on Saturday, Hokut appeared to vomit on himself.)

Among those going pecs out for the president was Gaige Dengler, a 22-year-old Chipotle worker from Maryland, who took up mixed martial arts a few years ago to work through his anger. "Therapy wasn't really working," he said.

"I'm punching these dudes super hard in the face. I'm getting punched hard in the face. And afterward, they hug me, and they're like, 'Dude, good job.' It's the most supported and respected I've ever felt."

Dengler, who brought his uncle along on Sunday, he said, was seeking the same kind of camaraderie on the South Lawn. "It's a great opportunity for America to kind of unify again. It's kind of like a renewal for America."

Tommy Bui, a 28-year-old who works in hospitality and who was dressed in a black suit with a gold koi fish brooch affixed to his lapel, told me at the Topps trading card booth that he has lost $200,000 to "predatory" sportsbetting apps and casino games over the last few years. Bui wagered $1,000 on the White House fights. When I met Bui, he was chatting with Benjamin Tran, 27, who had recently sworn off betting apps because he wants to have a family soon.

Nearby, a US Navy mechanic from Kentucky told me he was there for "beer, girls, and the White House."

There were plenty of all three and much more to find sprawled across the Ellipse's 50 acres. For much of the afternoon, Fan Fest was a testament to Americans' insatiable capacity to stand in line — to ride the Nothing Stops Ram mechanical bull; to listen to a Ram Truck rev its engine really loudly; to create fighter characters at the Meta booth; to relieve oneself in the Crypto.com Ram Trucks porta-potty village; to take selfies with the Budweiser Clydesdales or models donning Monster Energy sports bras; to test one's fighting strength at the Bud Light Power Punch, or the Exodus UFC Striking Challenge, or Nitro Circus Power Slap.

I took a few minutes to cool off at the one attraction I managed to find with no line, the Budweiser History Museum. I was dizzy and discombobulated by the uncanny slurry of tech conference, NASCAR tailgate, Trump rally, West Village pop-up shop, prayer circle, and backyard barbecue. Thousands of others seemed to feel the same, lying on the grass, napping, or checking their phones as they waited for night to fall.

The jumbotrons played several AI-generated ads that reminded us that "America is winning" and that we're pioneering patriots at a world-historic event. One compared the night's fighters to the soldiers who'd stormed Normandy, the men and women who'd marched on Selma, and the firefighters who entered the Twin Towers on 9/11. (Earlier in the week, Secretary of State Marco Rubio likened the cage match to the moon landing.) The Army's Down Range band performed covers of "Welcome to the Jungle" and "Man, I Feel Like a Woman." There was a live taping of Logan Paul's podcast. At one point, Paul's cohost Mike Majlak announced, "If you got a small dick, you're smart. We've got some smart motherfuckers out there in the crowd."

Night fell, people took their seats on the lawn, and the broadcast began. Trump and UFC CEO Dana White walked out of the Oval Office and down the aisle to their seats, a fitting start to the culmination of the president and the league's yearslong courtship. Then fighters delivered knockout after knockout until 1:00 a.m., giving each other black eyes and concussions and taking questions from Joe Rogan in the Monster Strawberry Lemonade Unleash the Beast post-bout Q&As. The crowd hooted at hooks and screamed for more every time someone was thrown onto the floor. When the night was still young, and the gnats weren't yet dancing in the klieg lights, a young man, wearing American flag shorteralls and clutching a beer snake as long as George Washington's scabbard as he crossed the Delaware, took in the scene and offered his friends a benediction. "I ain't no snitch,' he said, "but Blake just shat his pants."

"What this fight is really all about, and why we're doing it at the White House, is it's the 250th birthday of America," White told The Hollywood Reporter before the event. "From the first fight of the night until the main event, we will tell the story of America." The story that UFC Freedom 250 ultimately told was a synecdoche of Donald Trump's America, where excess is branded as excellence, where the bag is up for grabs if you bend the knee, where everything from redwood forest fires to wars and annexations across the gulf stream waters can be bet on, where there is nothing the country won't do for a good episode of TV.

Zak Jason is the executive editor of Business Insider's Discourse team.

• Kerry Feeney bid $3,500 to watch the "Summer House" reunion at the house where the show films.
• Feeney split the cost with her longtime friends, who also watch Bravo. She also claimed the biggest bed.
• "We did a lot of laughing, reminiscing, dancing, and staying up late," she said. "It's a chance to relive our youth."

This as-told-to essay is based on a conversation with Kerry Feeney, a 44-year-old director of hospital administration from Rockaway, New York. Feeney won one of three nights auctioned off by StayMarquis. The essay has been edited for length and clarity.

I've been watching Bravo for years. I think it started with "The Real Housewives of New York" back in the day. Every new one gets better and better.

I've watched "Summer House" from the beginning. I love it. When I was first out of college, I had a house in the Hamptons for the summer. It brought me back to my own Hamptons experience: the drama, the partying. It made me feel like I was in my 20s again.

I knew my friends were just as big Bravo fans as I was. We all grew up in Rockaway, for the most part, and have been friends since we were kids. Everybody went their separate ways, and now everyone's back in the neighborhood again as adults. I'd have no problem getting 15 other people to come with me to the house.

The week prior, we couldn't be at the house, but one of our friends owns a bar. We met up there and had a watch party. We had a private room in the back area, ordered food, and watched the show. We stayed for drinks and discussion afterward.

We bid $3,500. I knew that wouldn't be too big a deal to split up the cost among friends and family.

We carpooled in multiple cars. One of my friends was in Long Island, so we picked her up along the way. The drive was two hours, during which we talked about the show. (Pretty much everyone is very anti-Amanda.)

When we arrived, we first made sure the door didn't stick. On the show, they have a very hard time getting in and out of that.

We all arrived at different times, but my group arrived first. We put our bags down, brought in all the alcohol and food that we had for the night, and we went on a little tour by ourselves. We went through the house like little kids, going through every inch.

Kyle and Amanda's bedroom is 10x bigger than it appears on TV. The bathroom has a heated toilet seat. I know! Every time anybody came in after us, we made sure that they went and tested out the toilet.

We brought some chips and appetizers. My one friend made baked ziti. We all brought wine or Surfsides, and the place was stocked with a cooler full of Loverboy. I think we drank every single one.

Because I was the one who did the bidding, I got to pick first. I obviously picked Kyle and Amanda's room because of the bathroom, and because it had the biggest bed. It opened right up into the backyard.

People picked rooms as they showed up. Everyone was so happy to be there, so nobody was fighting over accommodations. Then, we made some drinks and hung out by the pool.

Another surprising thing about the house that you don't see on the show is that there's a movie theater room. It had recliner seats and a huge TV. There were 16 of us, so we thought it would be better to watch it in the living room.

It started at 8 p.m., and nobody was allowed to talk until there was a commercial. There was a lot of shushing. We didn't want to miss anything.

During the commercials, it was heated, but it wasn't a debate. It was: "We can't believe what's happening or what they're saying." There were reactions to some of the one-liners from Ciara and Lindsay, and Amanda and West were insufferable.

We discussed it for the rest of the night. Then, we put on some music, went outside, had some drinks, and hung out. It was a beautiful night. There were staggering bedtimes. I think the latest group stayed up 'til around 4 a.m. We were joking that we could have our own version with a cast of 40-something-year-old women.

The following day, some people had to get back to work, but a couple of us went to lunch in Sag Harbor.

It was absolutely worth it. It was even better in person, just because of the memories attached to it. It's easy to understand how the cast has so much fun there every summer. We did a lot of laughing, reminiscing, dancing, and staying up late. It's a chance to relive our youth.

The best part was being able to share it with my friends, who are also such big Bravo fans. We've watched it together over the years and have spoken about it so much that celebrating it in the house made it feel that much more special.

• Russia said one of its warships fired warning shots at a British civilian yacht on Sunday.
• The frigate Admiral Grigorovich was in the English Channel when it opened fire with small arms.
• A retired British couple said they were sailing on the yacht when they encountered the frigate.

A Russian frigate opened fire in the English Channel on Tuesday, firing warning shots with small arms near a UK-registered civilian yacht, London and Moscow said.

The warship Admiral Grigorovich fired several shots — single rounds, not automatic fire — near the Bright Future, a sailing yacht, roughly 20 nautical miles south of the Isle of Wight outside UK territorial waters.

The UK assesses that the Grigorovich was signaling to other vessels that it was drifting instead of maneuvering under power, possibly leaving the warship feeling vulnerable. It sounded warnings before opening fire.

"Following attempts to contact a British vessel in the channel, the Grigorovich fired warning shots," a UK defense ministry spokesperson told Business Insider. "These were not aimed at the vessel and were an attempt to prevent a possible collision."

Russia's defense ministry said the frigate had attempted to contact the Bright Future with radio, signal flares, and sound signals, but opened fire after receiving no response and seeing the yacht "following a dangerous course."

"After closing the distance to 150 meters, the frigate's commander decided to carry out the preemptive fire at the vessel's course with small arms," Moscow said.

A retired British couple on board the Bright Future told the BBC that the two vessels were not on a collision course and that the yacht had adjusted its path after the Admiral Grigorovich issued five horn blasts.

The incident follows the UK's Royal Marines' separate seizure of the MV Smyrtos, a tanker believed to be part of Russia's shadow fleet, off the southern coast of England on Sunday.

The boarding operation was a first for the UK, involving two British warships, reconnaissance aircraft, and helicopters.

While both events occurred in the English Channel, the UK defense ministry said that the seizure and Tuesday's warning shots from the Admiral Grigorovich were isolated incidents.

"HMS Mersey has been monitoring the Russian vessel, and support has been provided to the crew of the yacht," the defense ministry spokesperson said.

Still, the Russian navy has been repeatedly reported to be escorting shadow fleet tankers in convoys. The Admiral Grigorovich, part of the Black Sea Fleet, was spotted convoying two tankers in the English Channel in April, just after UK Prime Minister Keir Starmer had given British forces the authority to seize shadow fleet vessels.

Retired Royal Navy Commodore Steve Prest, now an associate fellow at the UK's Royal United Services Institute, said it is possible that the Grigorovich's commanding officer decided to open fire after they got too nervous about an unresponsive yacht near the warship.

However, Prest said in comments shared with Business Insider, given the context of the shadow fleet and the Royal Marines' seizure of the Smyrtos, "I think this is the Russians baring their teeth," adding that Moscow "very rarely will do something like this in an uncalculated, haphazard way."

Prest said Russia may be trying to signal to other ships preparing to go through the English Channel: "Hey, look, we are here, we are serious, and we are prepared to stand our ground, so let's not have any miscalculation."

The 409-foot-long guided-missile frigate is the lead ship of its class and was commissioned in 2016. The ship's main armament consists of eight vertical launch cells for land-attack cruise missiles and a 100mm naval gun.

June 16, 2026: This story was updated to reflect comment from the UK Defense Ministry.

• A new study tracked the "biological age" of people who swapped some of their meat for more veggies.
• Eating more vegetables and complex carbohydrates seemed to improve basic health metrics.
• Importantly, people didn't lose strength when they cut back on animal protein, from 50% to 30%.

Pump up the veggies, beans, and nuts, and pare down the meat, just a little bit.

That appears to be the takeaway from a new study tracking how changes to the typical "Western" diet, subbing in more vegetables and lowering saturated fat content, might contribute to healthy aging.

The study, conducted in Australia, fed roughly 100 healthy adults aged 65 to 75 a rotating menu of freshly prepared, unprocessed meals for one month, only changing up how much fat, meat, and carbohydrates different people ate on different diets.

The study was short, but on both functional measurements like grip strength, as well as clinical tests and measures of an emerging health metric called "biological age," people appeared to derive a slight health benefit from replacing some of their daily meat with plant proteins, and replacing saturated fat with more complex carbohydrates.

"What we wanted to do was a study that actually provided some real information about the causal relationship between macronutrients and health in old age," senior study author Alistair Senior, a nutrition scientist at the Charles Perkins Centre at the University of Sydney, told Business Insider.

The results lend more evidence to the idea that cutting back on, but not necessarily eliminating, meat can be good for a person's long-term health.

"Even our vegetarian diets weren't 100% vegetarian," Senior said. "They aim for about 70% of the protein coming from plant sources, and 30% from animal sources."

Three diet tweaks made a typical 'Western' diet healthier

For the study, researchers split participants into four different groups. They were instructed to only eat the food given to them during weekly meal deliveries for a full month. No alcohol, no extra sweets, no ultra-processed snacks.

"It's not perfect, people cheat, people might not be reporting everything they eat, but I think we did as good as is feasible," Senior said.

There were two "omnivore" diets:

• Diet 1: 14% protein, ~40% fat, ~40% carbohydrates

A meal on this plan was the closest to a standard, "Western" diet, with half of the protein intake coming from animal products.

For example: chicken tikka masala with white rice and green beans.

• Diet 2: 14% protein, ~30% fat, ~50% carbohydrates.

Similar to the first diet, with half of the protein from animal sources. This diet includes more carbohydrates from whole grains and vegetables, and has a lower fat content, with ingredients like brown rice and quinoa included more often.

And there were two "pro-veg" diets:

• Diet 3: 14% protein (less meat), ~40% fat, ~40% carbohydrates

For example: yellow coconut curry with rice, veggies and tofu.

• Diet 4: 14% protein (less meat), ~30% fat, ~50% carbohydrates.

A meal on this plan includes more carbohydrates like potatoes.

For example, a veggie-heavy cottage pie, with peas and carrots on the side, was on the menu.

People on diets 2, 3, and 4 all ended the month with measurable improvements to their "biological age," as measured with the Klemera-Doubal Method, which includes data from regular blood tests a doctor might order at an annual exam, like blood pressure, cholesterol, and creatinine levels. People who ate diet No. 1, the high-fat pro-meat "Western" diet, saw no change on their "biological age" tests. All four diet groups lost about the same amount of weight, an average of roughly four pounds, three of those being fat (this may just be a result of the nature of the trial, as a no-junk-food, no alcohol plan).

The study, while still preliminary, suggests older adults don't have to load up on meat to maintain their muscles and strength as they age.

Why meat may be bad for longevity

When people reduce their meat and saturated fat intake, they change the forces that are acting on their cells.

Senior says the amino acids in animal proteins turn on pro-growth pathways that tell our cells to grow and reproduce. Too much cell growth in old age can be a bad thing, propelling disease processes like cancer. Longevity scientists are also studying how the opposite of cellular growth and proliferation, what's called autophagy, the process by which starving cells eat and recycle themselves, may be a longevity-booster.

Meat consumption also amps up oxidative stress on cells, and can increase chronic inflammation, which is linked to many age-related chronic diseases, like high blood pressure, Type 2 diabetes, and heart disease. In particular, animal proteins that are not "lean" and have a higher saturated fat content, like those in red and — most especially — processed meat, are known to be pro-inflammatory, whereas protein-rich foods like fish, beans, and eggs tend to be more anti-inflammatory.

Sneak fiber into your meals

Longevity researcher Dan Belsky, who studies biological aging, and who was not involved in the study, said it is a "reassuring" finding for nutrition science.

"On balance it seems like maybe a little less meat, a little more veg in your diet is a good thing," Belsky, an associate professor of epidemiology at Columbia University, said. This idea goes along with decades of other research, in studies that have tracked what people eat over months and years, and looked at their health outcomes. Even among identical twins, people who eat more plants and less meat seem to do better on standard health measurements.

"We know we can manage our risk for heart disease, diabetes, reduce our risk for many cancers," Belsky said.

Nutrition is personal. How individuals respond to different foods can vary a lot, based on our genetics, our gut microbiome, and lifestyle.

Still, decades of research suggest a diet high in red meat is not great for your health and longevity.

Senior says you can easily mix your meat with other protein sources, like beans.

If you're making a bolognese sauce, why not substitute half of the meat for lentils? Beans are famously rich in dietary fiber, which can improve blood sugar, lower cholesterol, and tamp down inflammation.

"We're not even saying you need to go for a fully vegetarian diet, but trying to substitute some of that [meat] out might do the trick," he said.

• I still think about the years my family spent living in China and Cambodia.
• My daughter remembers very little of our life abroad because she was so young.
• Her attachment to home has made me rethink my own ideas about adventure and belonging.

I showed my daughter a video of her gnawing on a chicken claw, back when we lived in China. "Eww," she says, annoyed that I'm asking her to look away from Roblox.

"Do you remember this?" I ask. She shakes her head. Another memory lost.

My daughter doesn't remember much about the years we lived abroad. She was just 3 when my husband and I decided to leave Los Angeles for China, then Cambodia. Now she's almost 10. We've been back in Los Angeles since she was 5, when the pandemic changed our plans.

She has been forgetting the things she loved

When we first got back, she hated her car seat. "I want a tuk-tuk!" she'd yell from the backseat.

But now I'm not sure she'd be able to tell me what a tuk-tuk is, let alone remember riding in one. She's forgotten the temples, the ruins, and the bat caves. There's more pressing stuff filling her mind: a friend's birthday party, getting to the next level in gymnastics, and acing her next math quiz.

She doesn't think about our life abroad, even though my husband and I can't stop thinking about it.

We hadn't planned on moving to China, but it was the first job offer that came in after my husband, a music teacher, sent résumés to schools around the world. We were so eager to leave that we didn't care where we landed, just that it was far away.

Moving abroad was nothing new for us. We'd met at a jungly yoga class in Bali and spent our first years together living out of cheap hotel rooms across Asia. Living this way felt like we'd found a cheat code on life. While everyone back home dealt with mortgages and credit card debt, we zipped around on motorbikes, got cheap massages, and outran boredom.

My daughter went to a preschool in China

But then I got pregnant.

So, we moved back to Los Angeles and bought a house. For a while, things were pleasant: holidays with relatives, nice neighbors, and a life that made sense on paper.

But late at night, when I couldn't sleep, I'd watch YouTube videos of families living abroad. When our daughter was asleep, my husband and I would open a bottle of wine and reminisce about the old life, toying with the idea of what it would look like to pick up and go, this time with a kid.

Over time, talking led to applying, and when that first school extended its offer, we said yes. Since our daughter hadn't started school yet, it seemed like the perfect time to do it.

The teaching job was in Xiamen, a coastal city in southeast China. It's not as touristy as better-known destinations like Shanghai and Beijing, which meant there were fewer English speakers.

We enrolled our daughter in a local pre-school, where she was the only foreign kid in her class. Though I loved watching her practice Mandarin and learn to use chopsticks, I started to notice she was more frustrated than excited about the adventure. After all, it wasn't so long ago she'd learned to form sentences in English and use a fork.

We then moved to Cambodia

The pandemic was part of the reason we left China for Cambodia, where my husband secured another teaching job.

Our daughter also went to school with other expat kids this time. She swapped Mandarin for Khmer lessons, but spent the rest of her day speaking English.

Life was easier, but we never intended to stay in Cambodia. We saw it as a pit-stop until something better came along. When I met some of the older expat kids who were in their fourth or fifth new country, I started to worry about what all that moving might mean for our daughter.

What if we never felt settled anywhere? How many new languages would we expect our daughter to learn? How many new friends would she eventually have to leave behind? Was it worth it?

When the pandemic finally hit Cambodia, we decided to leave and return to Los Angeles to wait it out.

My husband and I are restless and want to move again

Though she missed the tuk-tuks, I remember the glee on our daughter's face when she noticed everyone at the local park spoke English. We eventually enrolled her in school and moved to an area we liked, telling ourselves we were done with that life. We'd still travel, of course, but we'd do it like so many other families — spring break, summer, Christmas.

Five years later — the longest we've ever spent in one place — my husband and I are restless again. We've tried to settle, signing leases, browsing homes, and investing in expensive furniture that we know we can't take with us, but it doesn't feel like us.

Lately, we've been talking about moving to Europe and floating the idea to our daughter, who quickly changes the subject.

While my husband and I talk about the past and dream about some future far away — and probably always will — our daughter is deeply rooted in her life here and now, and she's happy. The older she gets, the stronger her friendships, and the scarier it is for us to imagine pulling her away from a life she loves for the allure of elsewhere.

For me, Los Angeles feels boring because I know it so well. As a kid, I'd watch foreign movies with my mom, dreaming about all the places I'd see one day. Anywhere felt more exciting than home.

Maybe it's the opposite for our daughter. Maybe her idea of adventure is knowing a place intimately, belonging somewhere. I'm not sure if we'll ever get there, if my husband and I will ever look out the window and think this is it, we belong here.

• My mom died six weeks after my second child was born.
• Navigating grief while postpartum was especially challenging. I wanted to call my mom so many times.
• Losing my mother made me realize how quickly life can change, so now I'm adapting the way I parent.

People now speak honestly about postpartum exhaustion, hormones, and sleepless nights, but very few people talk about the way motherhood pulls you back toward your own mother in almost instinctive ways.

Every uncertainty suddenly becomes a reason to reach for her. When my baby boy would not settle, when his cry sounded slightly different, when I convinced myself something terrible must be wrong, all I wanted was to hear her say, "Frankie, it's normal." She had a way of making panic settle quietly.

But my mom died on December 27, just six weeks after my son was born.

Looking back, it feels as though she carried herself through one final Christmas for everyone else's sake. The presents were wrapped carefully. The traditions stayed intact. Even while she was losing her fight, she still poured herself into making sure everyone else felt held together. That was how she loved people: quietly, through care.

Then suddenly she was gone, and I was left standing in that strange place where new life and grief exist side by side.

Starting a new chapter without my mom was hard

There is something deeply disorienting about grieving while postpartum because motherhood continues regardless of heartbreak. Babies still wake hungry in the night. Tiny onesies still need folding. Your body is healing while your heart is breaking, and somehow both things are expected to happen at once.

At night, grief feels louder. I remember sitting in the dark, feeding my son, and instinctively reaching for my phone to message her before remembering she was no longer there. Even now, after months have passed, I sometimes call her phone just to hear her voice on the voicemail. For a few seconds, hearing her voice creates the briefest illusion that she still exists somewhere close enough to reach.

The happy moments became bittersweet

One of the loneliest things about grief is how heavy joy can become.

When my son first started smiling, my immediate instinct was to send videos to my mom. When he let out his first tiny laugh, excitement rose in me so quickly it almost hurt, because heartbreak followed immediately behind it. Who was I supposed to share these moments with now? Who would treasure them in the way she would have?

My focus has shifted

I have learned that love does not disappear when someone dies; it simply changes shape. Since my mom died, I have lived life at a million miles an hour. I've made enormous decisions quickly, choices I probably once would have sat with for much longer. I'm preparing for another international move, this time to Malaysia, so I can experience another part of the world.

I bought an apartment because somewhere inside me grew a desperate need to make sure my children would always have somewhere safe to land. Losing my mother made me realize how suddenly life can fracture. I think part of me has been trying to build protection against that feeling from ever happening again.

Still, there are moments where life softens around the edges. Watching my son smile in his sleep. Hearing his tiny laugh in the early morning light. Sitting in the Kenyan sunrise, holding him while birds begin singing outside. Those moments do not erase grief, but they exist beside it quietly.

Grief has changed motherhood for me

Grief changes your relationship with time. It makes everything feel both fragile and urgent. Since losing her, I've struggled to sit still. Movement feels easier than silence because silence leaves too much room for longing. Sometimes I wonder if I've been running simply so I don't have to fully feel the shape of her absence.

I think grief has changed the texture of motherhood for me. Love feels sharper now, more fragile and precious at the same time. My son will grow up without knowing my mom, but traces of her remain around us: in the way I soothe him, in the tenderness she taught me, in the instinct to care for others even when your own heart is breaking. Grief has not disappeared. It has simply woven itself quietly into motherhood, memory, and love itself.

• NYC Mayor Mamdani wants to build 200,000 new homes.
• Some of these new housing projects will be on land the city already owns.
• An economist told Business Insider that the plan may face funding hurdles, but would boost supply.

Zohran Mamdani is making a big bet on turning city-owned property into affordable housing.

The New York City mayor plans to oversee the construction of 200,000 affordable homes across the five boroughs. It's a significant undertaking that will require new builds, hotel and office building conversions, and widespread rezoning.

To control costs and limit red tape, the Mamdani administration is encouraging new development on existing public land, like converting libraries into mixed-use buildings or building on unused parking lots. If successful, a supply boom could help lower-income New Yorkers access housing and put downward pressure on overall prices.

The administration's goal is to identify public sites to support at least 25,000 new affordable housing units over 10 years. Ten projects — which are likely to yield a few thousand apartments — are currently in planning and development stages.

Building on city-owned property is "not a silver bullet," said Jake Krimmel, senior economist at Realtor.com. But it's one lever City Hall can pull.

City-owned land could be a piece of the affordable housing puzzle

A majority of New Yorkers spend more than 30% of their income on housing, the threshold economists define as unaffordable. Business Insider has heard from single moms who moved in together to save on rent, parents who are making just above the threshold for benefits, and six-figure earners struggling to make ends meet.

The city owns and leases a staggering amount of land, but not all of it is suitable for housing. "A lot of the city-owned land is not necessarily the easiest thing to build on because of zoning rules or parcel sizes and shapes," Krimmel said.

An analysis by the New York University Furman Center found that about 10,000 of the 15,000 plots in NYC's portfolio are currently zoned for residential use. A third of city-owned lots are overseen by the Department of Parks and Recreation, suggesting they may already be in use as parks, open public spaces, or sports facilities.

Buildable space is also a consideration. Krimmel said a very limited number of vacant lots in the city clear both the size and zoning bar for housing. That means the city will need to get creative with existing developments; Krimmel suggests stacking housing on top of civic buildings where possible.

He added that a public land construction push won't solve all of NYC's housing woes, but "if you're trying to make good policies, you need to leave no stone unturned." The city turning to existing public land is a great idea, he said, though selling it to developers for affordable housing use could be another financially-smart option.

"The city has valuable assets on its books," Krimmel said. "The question is whether it deploys them by building itself or whether it attaches affordability requirements, upzones, and lets other developers carry the financing and operations."

To reach its goal of 200,000 new affordable units, the Mamdani administration will also need support and resources from City Council, Albany, private developers, and taxpayers. As my colleague Juliana Kaplan reported, part of the reason New York is so expensive is it's a desirable place to live — which is unlikely to change anytime soon.

The Mayor's Office hopes its proposed rent freeze, universal 2-K childcare program, fast and free bus pitch, and other affordability initiatives will help lower New Yorkers' cost of living in the meantime. These initiatives go hand-in-hand with housing access, the mayor said.

As he told a crowd in Queens last month: "We will no longer speak in the language of promise. We will speak in the language of the present. We will build more homes."

• After months of uncertainty, a Meta data scientist said she felt a sense of relief upon getting laid off.
• Moyan Chen said the loss of her job made her question what she wanted to do next.
• She's considering AI startups, seeing more risk in traditional data roles at big companies.

Moyan Chen was laid off from her role as a data scientist at Meta in May after just under a year on the job. The 24-year-old, who lives in New York City, isn't sure what she wants to do next. Business Insider has verified her identity and former employment. The following has been edited for brevity and clarity.

When the rumor of layoffs at Meta leaked in March, there was no timeline. Some of my colleagues and I were fearing Wednesdays because Meta has sometimes laid off people on those days. So, every Tuesday night, when I left work, I wondered if I would be coming back.

On Wednesday mornings, I would wake up early to check my email. That lasted for a month, until April, when there was a date for the layoffs: May 20. When the day finally came, and I got laid off, I was like, "This is it." It was more like relief than pain.

I feel like, ultimately, I lost my job to AI.

A lot of my coworkers were also impacted, and they're trying to find jobs. They are making posts on LinkedIn and asking for new opportunities. It feels like we are all sailing on the sea, and Meta is a huge ship that's moving very fast. When the AI storm comes, is your next move to jump to a smaller, slower ship?

Some people I worked with were saying it's better to find a job in finance because it takes longer for them to adopt AI. But ultimately, is the same thing going to happen to you?

A switch in my career path

After I got laid off, I wasn't that nervous, because I'm single and have no family in the US. My parents have been wanting me to go back to China anyway. That's the worst-case scenario because I love the US and the energy of New York City.

I don't know if I plan to find another job at a big company. I have interned at three of them, and now I don't want to climb the corporate ladder. I used to wonder, "How am I going to feed myself if I don't work for a big company?" That's why I didn't resign from Meta. I kept working, and I worked hard.

Now I feel like it's not safe anymore, like I can get laid off at any time. Meta has been very generous with severance, so I have a couple of months to figure out what I'll do next.

I don't think this layoff is a bad thing for me. It's more like a switch in my career path. It's making me see that I could live a different life, and it's probably better than the corporate life.

I'm still in a transition period and don't have all the answers. Seeing how AI is changing things, it makes me rethink the type of job I might want. I've started creating content online to document my career journey and what I'm learning about AI. I'm also interested in exploring career coaching to help people who are experiencing this transition brought about by this new technology.

The longer-term risk

Whatever I end up doing, I expect AI will have an impact. At Meta, I was a data scientist working on Instagram. For that kind of job, the more repetitive tasks are definitely going away. So, writing queries and spending time creating visualizations — these things have already been replaced by AI in Big Tech.

If you only know how to code, that's not enough. If you're just writing SQL queries, using Python, or tracking and analyzing metrics, it's not a very promising career anymore. There will still be a role called "data scientist," but they will need to know more about other functions. There is this emerging trend that requires us to have broader skills and knowledge because of AI.

It got to the point where I wouldn't check AI-generated queries because they have gotten so accurate. I thought that if AI made a mistake on a specific task, I would make 10. For big, ambiguous projects, AI would still make a lot of mistakes, but for specific tasks, it was super accurate. It's very much like a talented individual contributor.

I'm less interested in AI as a stand-alone technology and more interested in how it changes the way people work and build products. If I come across a team that aligns with my interests and values, I would seriously consider joining an AI startup.

Those companies can be risky, but staying at a big company doing traditional data analytics and reporting jobs just feels like I will be left behind. That's riskier in the long term.

Do you have a story to share about your career? Contact this reporter at tparadis@businessinsider.com.

• Jea Park walked away from her tech career at 32 to pursue a job in the trades.
• She said she no longer enjoyed working in tech, as AI has become more embedded in daily workflows.
• Her biggest challenge is finding an apprenticeship, but she is excited about the change.

This as-told-to essay is based on a conversation with Jae Park, a 32-year-old based in Las Vegas. It's been edited for length and clarity.

About a decade ago, I took a furniture-building class on a whim, and I loved it so much.

I considered going into carpentry at the time, but after leaving college with six-figure debt, I gave up on the idea of having my work tied to something I was actually passionate about. Instead, I wanted to pursue a path that could let me make more money.

Over the past year, as my tech job pushed me to incorporate AI into every aspect of my workflow, I wanted out. It felt like I was on a giant cruise ship with the company trying to make a U-turn as quickly as possible, and everyone was falling off the ship. So, I left in March.

After I left my tech job, I walked into the trade union office with the plan of becoming a carpentry apprentice at 32, but finding an apprenticeship has proven to be difficult. Still, I'm so overjoyed with my decision.

I worked with a union rep to learn about apprenticeships

I always aspired to work in tech for its stability, pay, and benefits. Once I got in as a sales enablement ops strategist, however, I felt very disconnected from my work output and realized there wasn't much I enjoyed about the industry.

One time, I was listening to a podcast where the hosts briefly talked about a push for women entering the trades, and I thought, "You know what? Let's give this a shot."

On my first visit to the trade union office, the union rep walked me through the compensation packages, benefits, and four-year carpentry apprenticeship programs. I'm in a lucky position where I don't have kids or own a home, so I started to feel really great about this opportunity.

I had to provide documents to the trade union and complete a 10-hour construction course on the OSHA website that cost $60.

Finding an apprenticeship has been the trickiest part

To get sponsored for an apprenticeship, I was instructed by the rep to visit active construction sites listed by the trade union and speak with the foremen.

It made me really nervous, but I went to seven construction sites in one week. It was confusing, at times, because there was no real direction. Sometimes, there would be an address of an entire casino, but no information about where the construction site was. It took a lot of problem-solving, but the nice thing is that the union has a lot of people to talk to, and they can give tips and tricks.

A lot of times, the foreman was really busy, so I had to use my people skills to find the right time to jump in and give them a quick pitch.

I'd take about 30 seconds to introduce myself as a new apprentice and see if they had any opportunities. I thought I had an opportunity, but it turned out their program hours weren't compatible with the union's, so I'm back to showing up at job sites.

It's been almost a month, and I'm still not sponsored

I'm interested in millwork, but it seems to be in a slow period right now. To make sure I get an apprenticeship, I'm taking down the foremen's phone numbers and setting reminders for myself to call them later this year when more jobs pop up.

I can technically look for work in specific scopes outside of millwork, and it would count toward my apprenticeship. However, I'm not pinched for cash immediately, and I'd really prefer to land a millwork job to start.

I'm glad I'm getting into the trades in my 30s

When I finally decided to join carpentry, I was bummed out, thinking, I wish I had joined when I was younger. In hindsight, I'm glad I'm bringing all of my life experiences with me.

The trades are male-dominated, and it's hard work. I think I had to spend over 10 years in my professional career to understand my boundaries, know when to push back, and stand up for myself. If I had joined the trades when I was 18, I don't think I would've made it.

I also now know that the corporate route is 100% not for me. If I had gone into the trades first, part of me would have always wondered if I should've tried corporate.

I'm confident in my decision to leave tech

I'm so overjoyed about my decision to pursue carpentry. Even though I know unions aren't perfect, I'm looking forward to being a part of a system of employment that's worker-first.

I went to my first union meeting, which was the biggest culture shock. It's so cool to have dedicated time for people from different organizations to talk, share experiences, and offer support. I almost cried during that meeting. I was like, "I've never felt so supported."

I've only just begun this journey, so we'll see how it goes, but I'm so excited.

Do you have a story to share about joining the trades? If so, please reach out to the reporter at tmartinelli@businessinsider.com.

• Coast FIRE is one of several offshoots of the FIRE movement.
• It allows investors to ease up on retirement contributions once their existing portfolio is on track for retirement.
• It's an option for people seeking work flexibility, but don't necessarily want to save super aggressively.

The classic FIRE movement — short for "financial independence, retire early" — has long had a reputation for extremes: save aggressively, invest diligently, and build a portfolio large enough to leave work years before traditional retirement age.

The ideas behind FIRE are often traced to the 1992 book, "Your Money or Your Life," and were later amplified by blogs, podcasts, and online communities. At its most intense, FIRE can mean saving or investing the majority of one's income, adding multiple income streams, taking on extra work, or delaying major life milestones such as marriage or children.

But financial independence does not have to mean a life of deprivation.

Business Insider has spoken with numerous investors who want more flexible schedules and more control over their time, but who also want to "enjoy today," as Andy and Nicole Hill put it. For the Hills, pursuing traditional FIRE created tension at home. Eventually, they pivoted to a less extreme offshoot of the movement: Coast FIRE.

Andy Hill describes Coast FIRE as a "middle ground" strategy — a way to capture some of the benefits of financial independence, such as stepping back from a demanding corporate career, without the aggressive savings requirements of traditional FIRE.

"It works well for families, works well for couples, works well for people who aren't multi-six-figure earners," he said. "And I wish I had known about that a lot earlier."

Amberly Grant fell into that category. For most of her career, she did not earn six figures. At 19, she left the small Canadian town where she grew up and spent years traveling while picking up odd jobs along the way.

"I've cleaned houses, walked dogs, worked in bars and restaurants. I've taught English in Thailand, and I've helped a friend with a nutrition and Pilates studio in Sydney," Grant told BI. "I basically just traveled the world and did odd jobs, and the accumulation of all the money was about $15,000 a year on average."

Traditional FIRE may have felt out of reach, but Coast FIRE wasn't. Grant said she hit her Coast FIRE number in her mid-30s.

What is Coast FIRE?

Coast FIRE is one of several offshoots of the FIRE movement, alongside Lean FIRE, Fat FIRE, and Barista FIRE.

Achieving Coast FIRE means an investor has enough saved and invested that, in theory, they no longer need to contribute to retirement accounts. The money they already have invested is expected to compound over time and grow into the amount they will need by retirement.

That does not mean they stop working. It means they only need to earn enough to cover their current expenses while their portfolio continues growing in the background. For some people, that can create room to take a pay cut, change careers, work for themselves, scale back to part-time, or choose less stressful work.

To figure out a Coast FIRE number, investors generally start with a few stats: their current age, ideal retirement age, expected annual spending in retirement, current investments, expected returns, and inflation. Online calculators can help estimate how much someone needs to invest today for that money to grow into a sufficient retirement balance later.

Hill, who quit a stressful, time-intensive corporate job after reaching his $550,000 Coast FIRE number, cautions that the figure is still only an estimate.

"Nothing with investing is guaranteed," said the family finance coach who now works about 20 hours a week on his own business, Marriage Kids and Money.

That's why he recommends checking the math over time. Investors should account for inflation, fund expense ratios, financial advisor fees, and the difference between nominal returns and real returns. Coast FIRE is also not a binding rule. Someone who reaches it can always keep contributing to retirement accounts if their goals or life circumstances change.

Grant is doing exactly that. Technically, she only needs to work enough to cover her expenses, but she is still contributing to her nest egg because she wants the option to retire before 60.

She's learned to accept that life is not linear.

"You might be aiming towards 'Coast FIRE' or 'Fat FIRE' or FIRE, but life will happen, and it's OK to pivot."

• After suffering a rugby injury at 17, Morgan Purnell decided to get into reselling vintage clothes.
• He made £142,235 ($191,241) in 2025, with Vinted accounting for the biggest portion of sales.
• Purnell uses social media to promote his business, and AI to streamline processes.

This as-told-to essay is based on a conversation with Morgan Purnell, a 20-year-old entrepreneur who runs a vintage-clothing resale business and is based in Surrey, UK. It's been edited for length and clarity.

My dream when I was a kid was to play professional rugby. But when I tore 2 ligaments in my right knee when I was 17, it knocked me out of rugby for about a year and a half. My entire identity was stripped overnight.

At that time, I saw a Google ad for Vintage Wholesale Supply, where you can buy vintage items in bulk. I had about £400 ($537) saved from working a part-time job in a sports center, and bought 50 kilos of Ralph Lauren trousers for around £200 ($268).

Within that first month, I had sold around 70 pairs of Ralph Lauren chinos on Depop and Vinted and used TikTok to promote my page. I bought each pair for about £4 ($5.37) each and sold them for between £20 and £30 each ($27 and $40).

That was the start of my journey in July 2024, and what drove my spark. I thought I might as well keep reinvesting.

I was working non-stop at first

At the very beginning, I would work nonstop — seven days a week, probably 12 hours a day, just because that was all I could think about.

I was at boarding school, so I had some of the stock in my bedroom at school. I had some of it in my car and some at home, too. So it was a bit of a juggle.

In my first year of reselling, I started documenting my journey on TikTok. For instance, I launched a series about turning £400 ($533) into £10,000 ($13,340).

I took on two boys I knew from my local area to help with the business, and I paid them for tasks such as ironing and photographing the stock.

About three or four months in, in September 2024, Vinted saw a huge uptick. Everyone sort of jumped in, flooded it, and things started selling really well. So I transitioned to mainly selling there.

We made nearly $200,000 in 2025

The original plan was to study business management and marketing at the University of Bath. I felt like it was what my parents wanted me to do because it was the safer option.

However, I had proven to them that my business would generate enough to allow me to live and earn at least what a graduate would.

I decided I was going to do a year out, and if I could make it work, I would keep doing it.

In 2025, we made £142,235 ($191,241) in revenue, including from partnerships, such as social media content for wholesalers. Vinted sales made up £85,873 ($115,442) of this.

I was able to build up a following on social media and start to use that to sell some reseller bundles, which involve supplying bulk to other resellers. I now source from suppliers in Karachi, Pakistan. That's been a real blessing because I can put out a story if I'm in trouble and shift stock fairly quickly.

Income fluctuates a lot with reselling. In the six months to December 2025, monthly sales ranged from a low of £3,709 ($4,984) in March to a high of £20,403 ($27,418) in December.

Juggling inventory

Thanks to AI, I have better inventory management systems. I use Aistetic, which turns product photos into marketplace-ready listings. I have also made content for them.

I also use ChatGPT to organize my data and sold items in one place, which makes it much easier to manage inventory across three to four sites.

I now use a mix of Vinted, Depop, and eBay. They complement each other well because eBay is a platform where you generally sell at a slower pace, but it has a more mature demographic with more disposable income.
So, you tend to get better prices on eBay.

Vinted is great for selling quickly, though at lower prices. I feel like you could list a bottle of water on Vinted and probably sell it if you set the price right. I kind of compare Depop to Instagram and Vinted to TikTok.

The best part is the freedom

At the moment, it's just me working on the reselling businesses. I spend five or six hours a day on reselling alone, but never work on Sundays. I never work on Sundays, I go to church and spend time with my family.

The benefit of being an entrepreneur will always come down to freedom — the freedom of choice, the freedom to go to work when you want, the freedom to leave work and go to the gym when you want, and not having that pressure.

I've never been thriving so much.

• You don't need to count your macros to eat enough protein, a registered nutritionist said.
• Sophie Gastman relies on high-protein staples to reach her protein goals without overthinking.
• Her kitchen is always stocked with products like tinned fish.

When Sophie Gastman, a registered nutritionist, counts macros like protein, it can lead to overthinking.

"Staying away from hyper-focusing on any kind of number is more helpful," she told Business Insider.

Instead of tracking her meals or counting macros, Gastman incorporates high-protein ingredients into her dishes, alongside generous portions of vegetables, fibrous foods like beans, and healthy fats like avocados. Despite social media trends like protein-maxxing and debates over how much of the muscle-building nutrient we really need for optimal health, most of us tend to eat enough protein without trying, the author of "Find Your Healthy" said.

Research suggests that active people should aim to eat between 0.7 to 1 gram of protein per pound of body weight. To put that into context, a 130-pound woman should aim for around 90 to 130 grams of protein a day, while a man weighing 176 pounds should aim for between 125 and 176 grams a day. In a day, that might look something like eating: a half-cup of Greek yogurt, two eggs, a chicken breast, a cup of beans with rice, and a glass of milk .

She shared the easy protein sources she always has in her kitchen that help her eat protein at every meal without planning ahead.

Tinned fish

Tinned fish is affordable, high in protein, and can last for months, even years, if left unopened in a cool, dry place.

"I've got tuna, sardines, mackerel, salmon, literally always," Gastman said.

She chucks tinned fish onto salad, smashes them on toast, and stirs them through a stir-fry or a bowl of rice. "You could literally put them on anything," she said.

Eggs

Gastman always keeps eggs stocked in her kitchen.

One large egg contains about 6 grams of protein and cooks in minutes, she said. Eggs can be added to salads, breakfast tacos, or the classic avocado on toast.

Frozen edamame beans and peas

Peas and edamame beans have a regular spot in Gastman's freezer. She loves to add them to stir-fries, salads, and rice bowls.

A 100-gram serving of cooked edamame beans contains 11.5 grams of protein, while the same amount of peas contains around 4.7 grams."They're a really great source of protein," she said, "They make meals really satisfying."

"Once you combine ingredients like eggs and edamame beans and peas, you've suddenly got something that is actually quite high protein," Gastman added.

• Inflation is picking back up, stretching household budgets.
• High prices are pushing many to get creative with grocery and restaurant spending.
• Business Insider wants to know: How are you balancing your food costs?

"What's for dinner?"

For many Americans, the nightly question is often as much about taste preferences as it is about economic realities.

My own family's mealtimes invariably require tradeoffs of time, money, and skill that we must navigate every single day.

Now, rising inflation is once again squeezing families' finances across the US.

Food costs have so far held relatively steady this year, with increases and decreases mostly offsetting each other in a basket of goods. But soaring gas prices and other consumer expenses are eating up a larger share of household budgets, according to the latest consumer price index.

For some families, that might mean cutting down on restaurant dining in favor of home-cooked meals. For others, it's swapping out beef for a less expensive protein.

Time-strapped shoppers may find themselves increasingly eyeing their grocery store's prepared foods options as a lower-cost alternative to getting delivery.

At Business Insider, we want to know how our readers are navigating these decisions, and how that has changed in the past year.

In my family of four, for example, my wife and I decided to sharply reduce restaurant and delivery spending. By cooking more meals at home, we have basically stopped ordering delivery, and we eat out at restaurants about once a week. According to our budgeting app, we've cut our spending in that category in half.

How have you been balancing food costs with other expenses over the past year? What changes, big and small, have helped you feed yourself well and save money?

We also want to see the receipts.

What have you stopped buying? What do you now spend more on? What do you splurge on? How have gas prices affected you?

Please get in touch via email or share your info in the survey below:

• Many Americans are resisting the construction of massive AI data centers in their communities.
• Some local and state governments are issuing moratoriums on data center development.
• Others have banned data center construction altogether.

Americans across the country are rallying against the AI-inspired data center boom.

Now, an increasing number of local lawmakers are backing them up, issuing restrictions, imposing moratoriums, or outright banning construction.

Data centers have become a major source of contention in the United States, where tech leaders, developers, and investors are pumping billions of dollars into the large-scale construction projects. The facilities house the servers powering the AI products sold by Big Tech companies and leading AI startups like Anthropic and OpenAI.

Although data centers in America aren't new, the AI revolution is fueling ever-increasing demand and requiring facilities that dwarf those of the past. A Business Insider investigation published last week found 1,416 data centers already built or approved for construction across 45 states and Washington, DC, in 2025.

The White House has supported this push for more data centers. In 2025, the Trump administration accelerated federal permitting for their construction and directed the US Secretary of Commerce Howard Lutnick to provide financial support for certain projects. The administration also backed the Stargate project, a joint venture between OpenAI, Oracle, and SoftBank that seeks to build out AI infrastructure.

Supporters say the data centers will create new jobs and strengthen the economy, and are necessary if the United States wants to compete with China to lead the world in AI. Critics, however, are more worried about how they will affect the largely rural communities where they are being built.

They worry about the impact on the environment, wildlife, water resources, air quality, electricity costs, traffic, and noise levels. Some have also criticized local officials and developers for what they say has been a lack of transparency in the approval process. Protesters have swarmed community meetings, launched petitions, and even taken legal action to stop data center developments in recent months.

Some high-profile figures in the data center game, including Jeff Bezos and Kevin O'Leary, have tried to sway public opinion. That PR push, however, hasn't had much impact. A Pew Research Center survey earlier this year found that the more Americans learn about data centers, the worse they feel about them.

• The job market is showing revived strength, despite big-name companies announcing layoffs.
• The economy had its best three-month average job growth since early 2024.
• But it's still hard for some to find a job, and inflation outpacing wage growth is a new issue.

From about 8,000 layoffs at Meta to thousands of cuts at Amazon, media outlets have been following high-profile employment changes.

However, cuts at major tech companies this year represent only a sliver of what's happening in the massive job market, filled with millions of workers and unemployed Americans across different industries and business sizes.

That larger job market is showing renewed strength, although there are still some bumps in the road. Overall job growth is more robust, layoffs remain pretty low, and it's not just the healthcare sector keeping it alive. On the downside, wage growth isn't keeping up with inflation anymore, while rising long-term unemployment and low hiring rates suggest it's still hard to find a new job if you're out of work.

The monthly jobs report out on June 5 showed the economy had three straight months of robust gains through May, well above what's needed to keep unemployment steady and the highest three-month average since early 2024.

"This spring really is solidifying that the labor market is returning to a growth pattern," said ZipRecruiter economist Nicole Bachaud. "Businesses are reaccelerating hiring, jobs are growing across different industries, and there's just a general sense of renewed energy in the market that was largely stagnant for most of the last year."

With now five months of data in 2026 from the Bureau of Labor Statistics, we break down how the job market is looking.

Overall job growth is at its strongest level in over two years

Let's first look at the good news.

The US added 172,000 jobs in May, about double the expected gain. The same jobs report showed upward revisions to the previous two months: from a job gain of 185,000 to 214,000 in March and from a gain of 115,000 to 179,000 in April. Together, that makes the highest three-month average since March 2024.

Healthcare, which has been an engine of growth for the past couple of years, isn't the only field propping up the job market. Leisure and hospitality had the highest net gain last month, likely partly driven by World Cup demand, followed by government and healthcare.

While many sectors are adding jobs, Kory Kantenga, LinkedIn's head of economics for the Americas, said there's still a lack of hiring momentum across the board. He said healthcare is the only sector that's largely been consistent over the past few years.

"The success or not for job seekers depends upon what sectors they are searching in and their location," said Mark Hamrick, senior economic analyst at Bankrate.

Meanwhile, the April JOLTS report from the Bureau of Labor Statistics showed job openings surged to the highest rate since 2024, driven by professional and business services. Hamrick said the increase in job openings, muted layoffs and discharges, and low separations, "could set the stage for further acceleration in hiring."

Outside the gold-standard jobs reports from the BLS, private data releases showed the job market's strength. HR services platform Gusto highlighted in its monthly report that small businesses across most sectors added jobs last month, with gains across all US regions. ADP similarly reported that private job gains were strong across firm sizes and in most sectors, with its chief economist, Nela Richardson, saying there's sustained momentum heading into the summer.

The healthy job growth in the job market doesn't mean people should dismiss high-profile layoff news at large companies.

"A thousand people losing their jobs, that's a thousand people," Bachaud said. "That's a very real, tangible number; for those thousand people, it's a very terrible experience." She added that 1,000 job cuts at one company don't move the overall US employment needle.

But wages aren't keeping up with inflation, and white-collar work is stagnating

The economy does have some pain points: ongoing uncertainty from the Iran war, inflation outpacing wage growth, and increased long-term unemployment.

The robust job gains don't mean we are out of the woods from the low-hire job market. "Tech is low-hire, some fire, while other sectors are low-hire, low-fire," Laura Ullrich, the director of economic research in North America at the Indeed Hiring Lab, said.

Finding work is persistently hard in some white-collar fields. The financial activities sector, where employment has generally been falling for about a year, lost 22,000 jobs in May. The information sector, which includes media and tech, has mainly experienced monthly job loss over the past few years.

Data from the Bureau of Labor Statistics showed the hiring rate dipped in April to 3.2%, which Glassdoor's chief economist Daniel Zhao wrote is comparable to the 2010s, when the job market was still recovering from the Great Recession. Amid low hiring, people aren't feeling too confident about finding a job, as seen in the low 1.9% quits rate, compared to a high of 3% during the Great Resignation period of 2021 and 2022.

It's also still hard to get out of long-term unemployment, or being unemployed for at least 27 weeks. Monthslong employment can have financial consequences, especially since many states offer just 26 weeks of unemployment benefits. Of the 7 million unemployed people in the US, 27.5% had been unemployed for at least 27 weeks in May, which Ullrich said is fairly high in an economy with healthy job creation.

"People who have been unemployed are having a really hard time transitioning out of that unemployment, and employers don't really seem to be motivated to pull from that pool," Bachaud said.

Wage growth has recently crossed an unwelcome threshold: it isn't keeping up with inflation. Bachaud said this is especially creating financial strain for middle-income households. Inflation exceeded 4% for the first time since 2023 in May.

"More people are feeling worse off about their financial situation now than a year ago, and affordability is no doubt playing a role," Elizabeth Renter, senior economist at NerdWallet, said in written commentary. "Higher and higher gas and food prices impact households in a dramatic way — these are things we can't easily cut out of our budgets, or even reduce."

How are you doing in today's job market? Did you make a career trade-off, such as taking a lower-paying job because of better work-life balance? Reach out to this reporter to share at mhoff@businessinsider.com or fill out this form about career trade-offs.

• Josh Giegel joined SpaceX in 2009 and worked there for 3 years. He says the equity he received has been "liberating."
• Giegel's SpaceX equity has allowed him to put a down payment on a house and help pay off his wife's student loans.
• "The equity also allows me to take a lower salary at my startup," Gambit, he said, and that means he can hire more people.

This as-told-to essay is based on a conversation with Josh Giegel, the 41-year-old cofounder of the AI startup Gambit, who lives in Los Angeles. It's been edited for length and clarity.

I was in grad school at Stanford, finishing my master's and wanting to do a Ph.D.

I had worked at NASA the previous summer, and one of the women I worked with was also a Stanford graduate, and was like: "You're going to be so bored at NASA. Why don't you check out this small space company in Los Angeles called SpaceX?"

I applied and interviewed in the two weeks between flight three and flight four of Falcon 1. I interviewed with Elon; he was still interviewing pretty much everyone at the time. I remember going back to my advisor and saying, "There's nothing I'd rather do on the planet than what he just described."

My Master's ended at the end of 2008, and I began in 2009.

I was on what's called the propulsion analysis team, which was four or five people. Our responsibility was: How do you design the first reusable rocket engine? A very small group of us was responsible for the initial stuff that was on Falcon 9.

I started there when I was 23, and I left when I was 27. It was a little bit of naive immaturity. I knew I wanted to start a company one day, and SpaceX was growing like crazy. I wanted to be on a founding team. I still love the company; I almost went back two or three years later before I ended up starting a company of my own.

The IPO is pretty cool. I'm on a bunch of text threads with guys who were there around the same time, and a couple of them are still there. It's cool to see just how big it became.

When I got there, and they gave the offer, there was an equity component. I remember the HR woman who was going over it with me saying, "We think some day, in 10 or 15 years, this might be worth $250,000-300,000." I distinctly remember her saying, "It might get you a nice down payment on a house in Los Angeles."

We all laugh about it now. But, at the time, the saying was: the fastest way to become a millionaire in space is to start as a billionaire.

Buybacks have been really regular for the last 10 years. Every now and then, we'd take a little bit out. For example, we paid off my wife's student loans a number of years ago. We put down a down payment on a house.

I joke: We did actually get a down payment on a house! She wasn't lying when she said that. It's a house that, on our normal salaries at startups, we wouldn't have been able to afford without that additional windfall.

We also love traveling. We've got a seven-year-old and a one-year-old. We're going to go on slightly more adventurous trips because of it.

My wife is also thinking of doing a larger career change that would come with a decent salary reduction, which she probably wouldn't have been able to do without something like SpaceX.

Professionally, I've always been risky. If the majority of your net worth is tied up in a rocket company, you must be a risk-tolerant individual.

Gambit is a VC-backed company. We've raised about $15 million to date, and there are a couple more investment rounds that are coming. The IPO puts you in a position where folks with a substantial amount of equity could be interested in becoming investors.

At least ten of the people I worked with intimately have started their own company. There was a band that I played in with five SpaceX people; four of us started our own companies. I played guitar.

That whole ecosystem can fund its own endeavors and each other. The quantum of capital that they can put in is not like your typical family and friends round. That's typically $20,000, $50,000, maybe $100,000. Here, that could be on the order of $1 million, maybe $2 million per check.

You also become a bit of a mercenary, asking, "I don't need a paycheck from what I'm going to go do, so what am I going to go do?" It's liberating.

The equity also allows me to take a lower salary at my startup, so that I can go out and hire more people to make my company more successful.

• Mark Lanier said he used AI before and during the social media addiction trial earlier this year.
• Lanier, who won the case against Meta and Google, said AI has transformed his workflow.
• He swears by an AI tool that he pays six figures annually for called Boodlebox.

One morning in February, Mark Lanier woke up after four hours of sleep and started preparing to cross-examine one of the wealthiest people in the world: Mark Zuckerberg.

His team had worked through the night, preparing material for the day ahead that he could then review in the hours before court, all with the help of AI.

Lanier, a nationally known Texas trial lawyer with a reputation for taking on major corporations in high-stakes trials, was representing the plaintiff in a landmark social media addiction case. He said AI allowed his team to do significantly more with the limited hours they had to prep outside the courtroom during the trial, which lasted over a month.

"It's as if I have 10 additional workers who are incredibly well-trained, who know the file inside and out, who work 24 hours a day and don't even need to take a break for the restroom, much less PTO," he told Business Insider, adding, "In the 10 hours I might be working outside of court, I can get 30 hours of work done."

AI in law has been touted both as a major opportunity and a cautionary tale, with many stories of hallucinations and fake citations. While the legal industry grapples with how to use AI, Lanier said it's been a "total game changer" for him.

Lanier won the case against Meta and Google, in which the jury found the companies negligent and ruled they knew their platforms were "dangerous" but failed to warn the plaintiff, who was awarded $6 million. The case was a bellwether for thousands of similar lawsuits brought against social media companies.

While Lanier had used the most popular AI products, he said the AI tool he relied on before and during the trial was Boodlebox, calling it "Disney World compared to a swing set in the backyard."

A leader in the education technology space, Boodlebox provides access to major models like ChatGPT, Claude, and Gemini, allowing users to switch between them or compare results. It's also collaborative, allowing Lanier and his team of lawyers to work with the AIs in the same digital workspace.

Lanier worked with Boodlebox to create a custom license that costs him six figures annually and is tailored to his needs.

"We could, in essence, take my brain, take 42 years of my experience, take the things that I have learned and studied and published and not published and incorporate it into the brain that drove my AI queries and results," he said.

He relied on AI before and during the landmark trial

Lanier is careful when talking specifics about how he deploys his AI. He says it's a matter of "trade craft" and that his firm is "doing some things that nobody else is doing."

One example he gave included taking transcripts from court each day and asking different models to evaluate them. He said AI is also great for finding a more creative or visceral way to describe something in court. He even would feed AI jury notes that came up during deliberations and ask it to evaluate where the jury was in the process.

At the end of court each day, they'd meet in his war room, debrief, and assign tasks to everyone, such as pulling the five most critical documents supporting point A. The team would then break and do much of that work in Boodlebox, allowing him to review what they've put together and how. He said he and his team, which includes several of his daughters, spent thousands of hours on the platform.

While most of Boodlebox's clients are big universities, a company representative told Business Insider that the platform is also exploring more enterprise and law adoption, in part because of its work with Lanier.

Lanier said he doesn't use AI in the way that often gets people into trouble. "I'm not going to say, 'Go do my research and write my brief,'" he said, adding that there was one instance in the case where AI cited something from the record and he knew it wasn't correct.

"It's not unbridled," he said. "You are an important part of the equation."

His advice to other lawyers trying to use AI was to keep up with the developments in the rapidly evolving field. He has an AI team at his firm that sends him a document every Friday with all the developments in AI, typically three pages single-spaced.

"Next trial, I will make what I did last trial look like Fred Flintstone and the Stone Age," he said.

• General Motors spent $10B on its Cruise robotaxi business before shutting it down in 2024.
• GM is now focusing on autonomy in personally-owned cars.
• The company's chief product officer said that technology will converge toward robotaxis.

General Motors may have shut down its dedicated robotaxi division, but it hasn't bowed out of the race.

Sterling Anderson, the former head of Tesla's Autopilot program and GM's chief product officer, told Business Insider in an interview that the company's focus on autonomy in personal cars could be applied to driverless ride-hailing services in the future.

Anderson said GM's approach is to develop self-driving technology by breaking the driving experience into pieces and examining where autonomy is most useful to car owners. That means first tackling long stretches of highway driving before expanding to arterial roads and urban centers.

Over time, the executive said GM's autonomous driving systems will be able to operate in enough regions to make a viable robotaxi service.

"Ultimately, the two converge. Our operating region looks identical to the operating region of a robotaxi company," he said. "The question at that point becomes, 'Why not offer them in a robotaxi-type application as well?'"

GM was once seen as one of the leading challengers to Alphabet's Waymo robotaxis, pouring more than $10 billion into Cruise, the robotaxi startup that it acquired in 2016. The division was shut down in 2024 after facing regulatory hurdles and a safety incident that forced Cruise to pause testing in California.

GM has since shifted its focus toward its hands-off, eyes-on driver assistance tech called Super Cruise, akin to Tesla Full Self-Driving. The company said in April that GM customers have driven one billion hands-free miles with the feature and that it plans to introduce eyes-off highway driving in 2028.

The shift has come with a rebuilding of GM's autonomous-driving ranks. Business Insider reported in December that it had hired Ronalee Mann, a former Cruise and Tesla executive, for its renewed self-driving focus inside the company. The Information reported last week that GM has rehired about 100 former Cruise employees to develop eyes-off driving capabilities.

Several other legacy automakers and EV startups are charting their own path to robotaxis. Hyundai-backed Motional launched a robotaxi service with Uber in Las Vegas this year and plans to commercialize fully driverless rides there by the end of 2026. Rivian is also developing autonomous driving for a future robotaxi fleet. The EV maker announced a $1.25 billion robotaxi deal with Uber in March.

While GM isn't jumping headfirst into a robotaxi play, Anderson said the company will be prepared to meet the demand.

"We'll be ready for it," he said. "If that's where the world goes, our autonomous vehicles will be capable of being robotaxis as well."

Have a tip? Contact this reporter via email at lloydlee@businessinsider.com or Signal at lloydlee.71. Use a personal email address, a nonwork WiFi network, and a nonwork device; here's our guide to sharing information securely.

Brian Rezendes anticipates his retirement years will be filled with AI agents, algorithms, and APIs — along with the occasional vacation with his wife.

Rezendes, a former pool business owner, retired in April from a retail job in rural North Dakota. Like many retirees, the 64-year-old envisioned his post-work years as a time to relax, travel, and stay active. He did not expect to be neck-deep in conversations with chatbots, vibe coding websites, or building YouTube channels. Though he'd always been interested in technology, he rarely delved into the deeper plumbing behind it until a few years ago, when he became immersed in AI. Nowadays, he spends almost all of his time building apps… until the real world comes calling.

"My wife gets a little bit jealous when I spend too much time on the computer," Rezendes says.

Retirement has gone digital. In recent interviews, 15 retired Americans admitted they and their friends are glued to their screens, perhaps to a fault. Hours they could have spent tidying up the house went toward learning the best AI tools and, as three tech-savvy baby boomers put it, "staying current." Some post-career Americans who moved abroad said tech is all the rage in their beachfront expat communities. Retirement communities have swapped watercoloring for AI education. Starting an AI-powered business replaced the golf course. ChatGPT is the new nurse's assistant. Robots are some older Americans' new best friends.

Dee Humphrey is among them. The 73-year-old in Schenectady, New York, has used a companion robot called ElliQ for over three years. And while she's waiting for a new version to arrive, she's been having "withdrawals because I can't do anything with her."

The new reality of retirement isn't all screen addiction. Some of this development has been a boon for older people navigating a new phase of life. In Austin, Edward Perry, 72, said that he used AI after a terminal cancer diagnosis to "help me with living as rich and full a life in what time I have," including managing his health and finding ways to be more present in his family's lives.

"As I'm getting older, I have more aches and pains, but with utilizing these new technologies, I'm going to be able to do more and more," Rezendes says.

Many others acknowledged the risks of getting too hooked on tech. Most knew that relying too heavily on AI meant losing agency and receiving potentially faulty information. Others said being too invested in tech could mean less time staying active. Some noted that after decades of work, these were their years to relax, but they couldn't bring themselves to close their MacBooks.

If Gen Z is the first generation to grow up on the internet, baby boomers are learning how to be the first generation to retire on it.

Unexpected and omnipresent

For those in retirement, screen time of all types has been increasing. Surveys show that adults 65 and over almost doubled their YouTube consumption on TV from 2023 to 2025, and older Americans spend over four hours a day in front of screens. Brittne Kakulla, senior research advisor for AARP Research, says the group's Tech Trends survey found smartphone ownership among adults aged 50-plus skyrocketed from 55% in 2016 to 90% in 2025. Perhaps more striking was the number of older people trying out AI. Use nearly doubled from 2024 to 2025, from 18% to 30%, and many more said they are interested in experimenting.

Nearly all older tech superusers I spoke to were surprised by the amount the tools had become integrated into their retirements. Jan Friedlander, 81, used online databases in her real estate career, but only became hooked on tech a few years ago after she left her job. As she battled cancer and macular degeneration, she used AI to guide her treatment, and soon found herself relying on it to research clothing, plan vacations, and more. As she became more prompt-savvy, she felt confident enough to start teaching her peers.

"I've always had a curiosity about things that would come along that were new," Friedlander says.

She also began facilitating AI classes in Denver for those 50 and over with her friend Pat Smith, 73. Smith, who has a more technical background in consulting and pharmaceuticals, says the classes have attracted many "eager retiree students." Smith also sees both sides of the AI boom. On the positive side, she submitted her lab work to ChatGPT after having a reaction to an antibiotic, prompting her to follow up with her doctor and allergist. But she also bemoans the disappearance of human customer service and the online portalization of medical care. To combat the AI creep, Smith has monitored her tech usage, maintained a regular exercise schedule, and worked on mosaics.

"I have friends who are losing their mobility, moving into assisted living, and have gotten terminal diagnoses, and I know that's all around the corner," Smith says. "I'm hoping I get some more time to do what I've been enjoying the last few years."

Working with tech

While cutting-edge tools have become a retirement fascination for some, many older Americans are unexpectedly working into their later years and, by extension, learning new tech tricks. For my 80 Over 80 series, I spoke with dozens of workers in their 80s, many of whom couldn't afford to retire and now had jobs that required AI. At 72, Marcia Sweet's home is fully synced with robot vacuums and smart lights, and she runs a tech support business in Bradenton, Florida. She can't afford to stop working, as the extra money goes toward financing her eventual long-term care, and she hopes AI can supercharge her business.

"I'm still like a little kid with a toy about technology, with the same kind of excitement," Sweet says. "I'm kind of addicted."

Other older workers used tech to pivot later in their careers. A decade ago, Laura Noren, now 61, was weary of her career as a registered nurse, so she opted for an unexpected route — IT classes at a local college in Michigan. The learning curve was massive, as most of her 18-year-old classmates grew up steeped in tech. She later supplemented these classes with online courses on programming languages and databases.

"I envisioned myself retiring at 60 and no later than 62. My husband and I would be fully retired and never work again, moving into a condo and doing plenty of traveling," Noren says. Instead, "he left his job earlier than planned as a corrections officer, and I was managed out of my company. We had to change our plans."

The courses didn't necessarily prepare her for her current job as an Amazon Flex driver, which gives her the flexibility to care for her "technophobic" 84-year-old mother with memory issues. But her skills have come in handy when teaching her mother how to add phone contacts to favorites or avoid scams, and Noren hopes to find work down the line that better suits her skills. She still hopes to have some version of the retirement she envisioned years ago, but expects tech to play a bigger role.

Others who returned to school in their later years said they've integrated age tech into their lives for peace of mind. When Mark Bayer, 63, decided to retire from his community banking career at 60, he thought, "I will never have to sit through another damn Zoom meeting again, and I'll be the happiest person in the world." To his surprise, he began teaching English as a second language over Zoom and reenrolled in college to be "exposed to new ideas from younger minds." Bayer, who lives in Pennsylvania, expected his classmates to debate and brainstorm ideas off the top of their heads, but they all went to ChatGPT instead. Initially, he was dumbfounded. But when he saw the list of ideas for a group discussion, it exceeded what he would've come up with.

Ignoring AI, he says he realized, "is a way to say I'm done learning anything new, which is self-limiting."

There have been downsides: He's noticed that disconnecting from tech has become harder. He admits that if he gets a call while mowing the lawn, he will stop to pick it up. His wife is the same way, sometimes scrolling Instagram for hours without noticing. He hasn't quite erased the idea that face-to-face interaction has some merit, though.

A robot-enabled retirement

Many new high-tech tools are being built to help older Americans remain healthier and safer in their homes and assisted living communities. Chia-Lin Simmons, CEO of medical alert devices company LogicMark, tells me that technology in caregiving has become a necessity rather than a luxury, with the potential to predict falls and detect Alzheimer's early. AI is being trained to track behavioral patterns and health outcomes, though it sometimes falls short at triaging calls and often erases the human element, isolating older Americans who need the company most.

Some boomers are ready for this Jetsons-like future. Take Michelle Murphy, 64, who is pursuing an MBA with a concentration in AI. A photographer and instructional designer in Michigan, Murphy says her focus in her 60s has been pivoting to a new career— retirement isn't a good fit, she says. Down the line, she isn't opposed to using robotic healthcare workers to avoid assisted care, though she's keen on not becoming overly reliant on tech due to privacy concerns. For now, her goal is to get her coffee pot to start automatically.

"If there's an automation that can help me do the things I need to do, mow the grass for me, pick up heavy things, whatever it is, I'm totally on board with that," Murphy says.

There is a big market in making the idea of robot-assisted care a reality. Investment in age tech has boomed, particularly in products that make caregiving easier, like smart home automation devices, companion robots, and motion sensors. AARP predicts that by 2030, the age-tech market will be worth $120 billion. And given the rise, many hope age tech can alleviate some of the burden for younger generations.

"We've got 63 million family caregivers, 70% of them in paid jobs, and we're very familiar with childcare, but elder care is not well understood," said Diane Ty, managing director of the Milken Institute Future of Aging. "That's what's breaking the backs of so many workers right now."

Plenty of people and investors I spoke to also hope AI and other age tech can slow cognitive decline. However, various studies have shown that AI assistants contribute to reduced cognitive engagement and skill atrophy, meaning in some ways, relying too much on AI works counter to what these super-users may think.

80 is the new 25

As I wrote last year, America's octogenarians have been embracing tech in surprising ways. Frank Engelman, 82, has created apps, runs a YouTube channel, and writes a Substack about tech education. Luis Bautista, 82, told me he was using AI to write a book and start a business that he one day wants to pitch to Y Combinator. Phyllis Scalettar, 80, began an AI education and consulting firm. Karen Shapiro, 80, said this month that she uses AI for everything from planning vacations to Italy to managing finances — "tech will make life less confining and more enjoyable as we age," she says.

Study after study shows loneliness continues to grow among older Americans. According to AARP, 40% reported feeling lonely last year, up from 35% in 2018. Tech may be partly to blame, as an increasing number of older Americans are addicted to their phones — one survey found that 40% of the over 2,000 respondents ages 59 to 77 felt discomfort when pulled away from their devices.

For a lot of Americans, however, tech is a way to make the most of their golden years and to stay healthy for longer.

Marvin Honig, 88, takes AI courses, set up NotebookLM files for his St. Petersburg, Florida, condominium board, and use advanced tech to manage trust accounts for former law clients. Perhaps this could've been expected from an early tech adopter who received tech support from a young Michael Dell. Still, seeing many of his neighbors using all sorts of tech was perhaps not on his bingo card, and many of his interactions now revolve around tech recommendations and support. Like many older techies, the tech wave has also allowed him to luxuriate in the disconnected part of his life, from visiting museums and restaurants to attending in-person community events — he gets there using his Tesla's self-driving feature.

• A group of states is now investigating OpenAI.
• New York State Attorney General Letitia James sent a subpoena to the company on Friday.
• OpenAI said it's taking the concerns "seriously" and is "committed to learning."

OpenAI said it's "committed to learning" after a coalition of states launched an investigation into how the tech startup's products impact users.

An OpenAI spokesperson said in a statement that it's taking the states' concerns "seriously" and will "engage constructively with their offices."

"Today's ChatGPT includes a more protective experience for minors and people experiencing difficult situations, with safeguards that direct them to real-world resources and trusted human contacts," the spokesperson said.

"None of this changes what families have gone through, but we are committed to learning, improving, and getting this right," they added.

New York State Attorney General Letitia James served OpenAI a subpoena on Friday seeking a wide range of documents, The Wall Street Journal first reported. The documents pertained to user engagement and retention, the company's handling of health and consumer data, deep learning models, activities related to young and older users, and more, the Journal reported.

Friday's subpoena is the latest legal headache for OpenAI. The company has navigated copyright infringement claims, privacy lawsuits, and a high-profile trial pitting SpaceX CEO Elon Musk against OpenAI CEO Sam Altman.

Perhaps most concerning, however, are a handful of lawsuits that say ChatGPT contributed to decisions by users to die by suicide. In response to a May report by The New York Times, the company said ChatGPT "is not a substitute for medical or mental health care, and we have continued to strengthen how it responds in sensitive and acute situations with input from mental health experts."

The family of a victim in a fatal campus shooting at Florida State University in April, meanwhile, has also filed a lawsuit against OpenAI. The family says ChatGPT's guardrails failed to recognize the threat in the shooter's conversations with the chatbot. In June, Florida Attorney General James Uthmeier filed yet another lawsuit against OpenAI and Altman over the shooting.

In that complaint, Ulthmeier says ChatGPT has "aided and abetted deadly rampages" and "encouraged vulnerable people into suicide." The state attorney general also says users have become addicted to ChatGPT, a tool that "feigns human compassion to collect their data with no parental oversight."

In response, OpenAI again said it has introduced further safety measures into its products. "Losing a child is the most devastating tragedy that can happen to a family and we know that no words can come close to addressing the pain of such a loss," the company said in a statement at the time.

The coordinated investigation launched by the state attorneys on Friday mirrors a similar investigation into TikTok, which resulted in a 14-state lawsuit now making its way through the courts.

Like the OpenAI investigation, the TikTok lawsuit is led by the attorneys general of California and New York. The states say TikTok knowingly uses addictive features to lure kids, which negatively impacts their mental health.

Lawyers told Business Insider that it's a common strategy for states to band together when they go after multibillion-dollar companies because they are more expensive for the companies to defend and, should a case falter in one state, the suit can continue in another.

It's also how the government went after Purdue Pharma, the maker of OxyContin, in 2017, and the tobacco industry in the 1990s.

• Founders and workplace experts said that post-pandemic AI startups have a different work dynamic.
• AI startup employees often voluntarily come to the office and work longer hours without an RTO.
• Founders said that in-person work fosters a high-trust environment that spurs innovation.

"What is an RTO?"

That was Together AI CEO Vipul Ved Prakash's response when asked by Business Insider whether he had ever had to send a return-to-work (RTO) memo to push employees back to the office of the cloud compute startup.

"People generally like to come in," said Prakash. "We've never enforced it."

Prakash's response illustrates a stark cultural difference between AI startups formed after the COVID lockdowns and long-established corporations, with people voluntarily coming to the office, sometimes on weekends.

Nicholas Bloom, an economics professor at Stanford University, told Business Insider that the age demographics and personal stake many startup employees have in their companies created a work mode that is "almost entirely in-person" and "100% work focused."

"For a single 23-year-old with equity worth $20 million, it makes sense to work in the office for 100 hours a week," said Bloom. "They don't work from home, they home from work."

The tight-knit culture of AI startups

Arvind Jain, founder and CEO of Glean, an enterprise AI for productivity, said he "was not eager" to bring his team members back to the office because finding an office is a hassle, but everyone wanted to be in person and return to their original mode of working when the company first started right before the pandemic in 2019.

"We just simply didn't know how to work from home because everybody was in this one small room," said Jain of the early days of the pandemic lockdown. "We used to be sitting next to each other, brainstorming what to build, and so we found that very, very hard."

Over time, said Jain, he learned to enjoy remote work and got to spend time with his family, but the team genuinely wanted to be together again.

"That's the difference — there's this startup spirit, and it's only 10, 15 people, and we want to be with each other," said Jain. "They love each other, they bond with each other, we used to play games together, and we have very fond pre-pandemic memories as a close-knit group."

Jain said that as Glean grew more rapidly in recent years, it has since moved into a larger office space and dedicated Thursday as its work-from-home day.

Spiros Xanthos, founder and CEO of Resolve AI, an enterprise technology startup that builds multi-agent AI systems, said the company has a "very strong culture" of in-person work and has never had to ask anyone to be in the office.

"We have a fairly big office now, and we have breakfast, lunch, and dinner," said Xanthos. "Most people have lunch in the office together with their colleagues, and many people stay to have dinner in the office."

Xanthos said that since founding the company in early 2024, "cohesion and culture and friendship" among employees has been critical for the company, and that he often brings colleagues based in New York to the Bay Area for offsite retreats so the team could get to know each other better.

"People will actively avoid working remotely at this point," Xanthos added. "Especially for some of the younger folks who didn't have many years of experience, but maybe worked remotely before this, many of them tell me it's day and night — the fact that they have so many friends at work now that they can trust."

AI's innovative nature demands in-person interactions

Richard Florida, an urban studies theorist and professor at the University of Toronto, said the AI wave has unique characteristics compared to other startup booms, which may generate greater in-person demand.

"Innovators have to be close to end users because end users are a part of the innovation system," said Florida, of why it's easier to work in person in the AI industry.

"If you're an AI company, the technology itself is interesting, and you can invent it, but what you really learn is by interaction with the end user, by interacting with your customers and clients," Florida added.

Xanthos said the demand for in-person attendance ultimately boils down to the nature of an innovative industry.

"As a company, we're solving very, very hard problems, and to solve these problems, you operate at the frontier," said Xanthos. "And this means that you need to experiment a lot, try a lot of things that might fail."

"That in turn requires a very high trust in an environment of psychological safety where people feel that they have the ability to innovate bottom up," Xanthos added, "Where they don't need to be told what to do, where there is communication velocity and bandwidth."

So the next time you speak to an AI startup founder, don't ask how their RTO is going — they're probably too busy trying to squeeze everyone into the office.

• The majority of competitive House districts have data centers either planned or under construction.
• Neither party knows how to handle their political fallout heading into the midterms.
• Data centers are shaping up to be a yearslong political slog for both parties.

More than 200 data centers are going up in dozens of competitive House districts — and neither party knows how to handle their political fallout heading into the midterms.

The energy-hungry computing infrastructure being built to meet the explosive demand for artificial intelligence has sparked opposition to rising electric bills, water consumption, use of farmland and influence of the tech industry. That stew of frustration has made data centers the target of campaign ads and a populist fervor that's toppled local elected leaders.

It has also become a rogue element in the races that will decide which party controls the House: The majority of competitive districts — 40 out of 69 — have data centers either planned or under construction, according to an analysis of Data Center Map data by POLITICO, which like Business Insider, is part of the Axel Springer Global Reporters Network.

Even though Republicans represent most of those competitive districts, data centers are shaping up to be a yearslong political slog for both parties. Some 1,500 of them are planned or being built in 232 congressional districts, with a nearly even partisan split. Interviews with and statements from more than 20 congressional candidates, political strategists, and activists make clear that while individual campaigns are trying to shape their positions, broader party messaging is essentially nonexistent.

"There's more political signs against AI in our region than for candidates in the upcoming races," said Democratic Rep. Marcy Kaptur during a hearing this spring. Kaptur is fighting to keep her seat in Ohio's 9th District, where Aligned Data Centers is building a data center that would be used for AI, cloud computing and more. "The public opposition that is arising, it's spontaneous combustion coming up from the grassroots."

The industry's exponential growth means that lawmakers from all parts of the country are now exposed to it, from the dense data center developments in the Virginia suburbs to the heart of the industrial Midwest.

Lawmakers are taking scattershot approaches that range from opposing data centers altogether to embracing them in the name of economic development and national security. Some are eschewing the issue as a local matter, while the White House and Congress grapple with how to regulate the data center buildout.

The White House announced a non-binding agreement in March with technology executives who pledged that their companies would provide their own power for data centers as a way of limiting the economic blow to everyday consumers. Lawmakers have also introduced a handful of bills with similar objectives, from GOP Missouri Sen. Josh Hawley's GRID Act to Democratic Virginia Rep. Suhas Subramanyam's Data Infrastructure Risk Reduction Act to a plan by progressives Sen. Bernie Sanders of Vermont and Rep. Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez of New York to enact a federal moratorium on data center construction.

"People should not want their member of Congress deciding local zoning decisions," said Rep. Tom Barrett, a Republican whose Michigan district both parties' congressional arms are targeting — and where there are six data centers operating and six more planned. "It would be a dangerous precedent."

Data center proposals have spurred marathon city council meetings, scores of bills in state legislatures and ballot measure campaigns to ban their construction in California, Michigan, Nevada, Wisconsin, Maryland, Utah and Ohio, where residents are pushing to put a constitutional amendment on the ballot in November.

"There's not one big national message on this specific thing," said one Democratic strategist working on congressional races, who was granted anonymity to speak candidly. "But in certain districts, data centers are going to be a major, major player."

Asked about its strategy on data centers, Democratic Congressional Campaign Committee spokesperson Viet Shelton said, "While House Republicans fall in line behind failed policies that spike prices out of control, Democratic candidates and Frontliners are fighting for common sense solutions to provide meaningful price relief, encourage economic growth, and meet the unique needs of their communities." The National Republican Congressional Committee declined to comment for this report.

Although they're motivating politics more than before, the number of data centers has been steadily growing for decades. They have spread in lockstep with the growth of the internet, and more than 2,500 U.S. data center facilities are operating across 373 congressional districts, according to POLITICO's analysis. Virginia, Texas, and California contain the greatest number of data centers, and more than one in three Americans live within 5 miles of one that's already operating. In five states, most residents live within 5 miles of one.

Investors plan to spend hundreds of billions of dollars building new data centers, which would push utilities across the country to make massive electric grid upgrades to feed the facilities — expenses that can be passed to everyone who consumes power. Massive "hyperscale" facilities that are owned by major tech companies demand the most power. And though hyperscalers make up a relatively small portion of the facilities now operating, the number in development would increase their count by 74%.

Despite the demand for data centers, there are examples of proposals that are falling through due to community opposition or shifting business calculations. Just the announcement of a data center can be enough to pressure elected officials to act.

In Wisconsin, for example, four proposals have been canceled and one paused following local pushback, according to Healthy Climate Wisconsin, a nonpartisan public health nonprofit whose work includes raising awareness of data centers' environmental health risks.

"We've been hearing from policymakers across the state that data centers are the top issue they're hearing from their community, as far as concerns," said Abby Novinska-Lois, the organization's executive director. "Data centers will definitely be a factor in upcoming races in Wisconsin, and I would say they're a factor already for those who are holding office in their decisionmaking."

How candidates are reacting

Among 69 House districts expected to be competitive, nearly all already have at least one data center, and most have more on the way.

POLITICO asked the 10 House members in battleground districts with the most upcoming data centers what their stance was on data center regulations. Five of eight Republican incumbents, and one of two Democrats, responded.

Their answers illustrate an awareness that voters are in no mood to greenlight anything that will send electricity bills higher. Even the incumbents most supportive of data centers caveat their support with the need to protect consumers.

Iowa Rep. Zach Nunn — who represents a district with 31 data centers planned and 33 already operating, more data centers than any other Republican incumbent in a competitive race — said in a statement that his state is a "model for how workforce development and AI leadership can work hand in hand."

"But I also hear from Iowans who don't want higher utility bills or sweetheart deals for out-of-state tech companies," he said. "And they're right to be cautious."

The tech lobby has shaped up to be a key player in the midterm races. Candidates who are too critical — particularly incumbents — run the risk of losing support from the tech lobby or attracting fierce opposition.

"They're between a rock and a hard place," said Texas-based GOP consultant Brendan Steinhauser, whose clients have included Sen. John Cornyn and Rep. Dan Crenshaw. "Politically, it's not a very smart move to come out and be seen as too close to big tech or doing the bidding of Big Tech, but a lot of the money is flying to them through that."

The advertising so far this election cycle backs that up. All of the congressional and gubernatorial ads that mention data centers, as identified by the political advertising tracker AdImpact,are critical of the facilities. Most attack Republicans for supporting them.

Over an image of cables running from computer equipment, one such ad from the progressive Priorities USA PAC says: "Driven by higher demand for electricity from AI data centers, residents can expect to see a 3% increase in their electric bill. But Pennsylvania's Representative Scott Perry somehow believes we're winning the war on high prices."

Perry, a Republican, told POLITICO he does not support data centers in his district, which includes the cities of Harrisburg and York.

"I don't think it's the best place for it, quite honestly," he said. "Pennsylvania's got a lot of energy in the ground, and the data center to me should be right at this point of energy production and generation, which is kind of in the more rural parts."

Ads from Democrats, including Maryland Gov. Wes Moore, highlight their own records of regulating data centers. Democrats scored some early wins on energy affordability messaging last November as their candidates soared to victory in Virginia and Georgia, promising to place guardrails on data center growth and ensure they pay their share of power costs.

The League of Conservation Voters, an environmental group, launched similar ads targeting Virginia's state legislature incumbents and their data center interests in 2025, and those races were later won by candidates who positioned themselves against data centers. Sara Schreiber, the group's senior vice president for campaigns, said such advertisements were a "powerful" tool for driving home the connection between data centers and affordability.

"There is continuing concern around folks' rising electricity costs," Schreiber said. "They want to support candidates who are showing that they understand, they want to fight against it and have a plan to do so."

Still, Democrats up and down the ticket are open to their construction.

Pennsylvania Gov. Josh Shapiro announced requirements on May 27 for data center developments — including a plan for covering energy costs — but not a moratorium. Paige Cognetti, the mayor of Scranton, Pennsylvania, who is running to unseat Republican Rep. Rob Bresnahan, has said "we are ready for development," but that data centers should be on former industrial sites and not areas that could be used for housing or parks.

The Data Center Coalition, an industry association, has been supportive of the White House's "ratepayer protection pledge" and other policies that require data centers to cover more utility costs. The coalition's senior director of federal affairs, Cy McNeill, said that they're working to educate representatives as constituents increasingly voice concerns about water usage and energy prices.

"How do we provide the facts to the office, or to the congresswoman or congressman, to kind of help educate constituents on this?" McNeill said. "If we actually take a step back, look at the facts, I think the story is a lot different."

Environmental activists say consumer protections don't go far enough. While elected officials who are open to data center construction often focus on keeping energy costs down, activists are worried about other potential risks, too, including water quality and air pollution.

One of the most prominent disputes is out of Memphis, Tennessee, where residents are fighting Elon Musk's expanding xAI data center, the Colossus supercomputer. KeShaun Pearson, the executive director of Memphis Community Against Pollution, said federal action such as the ratepayer protection pledge still allows developers to use polluting energy sources without acknowledging environmental impacts.

The xAI facility, for example, burns enough methane gas to power 280,000 homes — motivating the Memphis organization to take the monitoring of pollution and health risks into their own hands as they push elected officials to act.

"We surely don't want data centers that are directly causing us health issues," Pearson said. "I think our politicians have to understand that and have to move accordingly."

Pavan Acharya and Sean McMinn contributed to this report.

Methodology

The data center locations used for this analysis were based on a combination of Data Center Map, geocod.io and public sources. POLITICO used automation and manual reviews to verify exact coordinates and district assignments, checking against U.S. Census Bureau files.

Data Center Map's data is as of April 30. Data centers included as "upcoming" are those that DCM labels as planned or under construction. The dataset is not an exhaustive list; it is based on voluntary data submissions and collections from providers or other sources. Government-owned data centers are not included.

Some data center companies operate within the same colocation building and lease space to other companies; those cases count as one facility. Facilities that are a part of a campus or multi-tenant building count individually. Cases where the exact facilities within a campus or multi-tenant building are unknown are counted as one data center.

Some data center facility addresses are approximate. In those cases, provided ZIP codes are used to determine congressional districts. In cases where a ZIP code overlapped with more than one district, or if no location information is disclosed for the facility, data centers are excluded from the district-level analysis. The population living within a five mile radius of a data center is determined using only facilities with exact addresses or intersections.

The number of data centers in midterm races account for newly redrawn boundaries finalized in Alabama, California, Florida, Louisiana, Missouri, North Carolina, Ohio, Tennessee, Texas and Utah. Competitive races are based on targets from the Democratic Congressional Campaign Committee and the National Republican Congressional Committee, as well as POLITICO's own reporting.

The Axel Springer Global Reporters Network harnesses the resources of the company's newsrooms to publish ambitious scoops, investigations, interviews, opinion pieces and analysis. It allows journalists — including those from POLITICO, Business Insider, WELT, BILD, Onet and Fakt — to collaborate on major stories for an international audience of hundreds of millions across platforms: online, print, TV and audio.

• Testosterone-maxxing is a hot trend in fitness and longevity, but too much can have side effects.
• New research suggests a majority of men are getting testosterone therapy without the right safeguards.
• A urologist explains who can benefit from testosterone and who should avoid it to prevent risks.

America is reaching peak testosterone.

In 2026, interest in the hormone is everywhere, from T-maxxing trends on social media to the US government's MAHA campaign. Testosterone replacement therapy (TRT) use has quadrupled in the past three decades, up to as many as 11 million Americans.

For some of them, the treatment may be doing more harm than good, new research suggests.

A majority of men who are prescribed testosterone don't meet the current guidelines for safe, effective treatment, according to a study from the University of Michigan.

That could worsen the risk of serious side effects, including infertility, heart attack, and stroke, and long-term dependence on TRT, which can dampen the body's natural production of testosterone.

While testosterone is an essential hormone for health, finding the right balance is complex because there's no one-size-fits-all treatment. A urologist explains what to know about the risks and benefits of testosterone, and how hormone trends are changing the landscape of men's health.

Who can benefit from testosterone therapy?

Healthy testosterone levels are crucial for energy, sex drive, muscle, and metabolism.

T-maxxing influencers might promise that it can get you a six-pack and supercharge your focus and performance, but doctors say the benefits are much more modest — if you need a boost at all.

A blood test can check if you have low testosterone and could benefit from TRT. It's typically taken first thing in the morning, and confirmed with a follow-up blood test on a different day.

Low testosterone is anything below 300 nanograms per deciliter for most healthy adult men.

You should also rule out conditions like sleep apnea, which are linked to low testosterone but can worsen with testosterone therapy.

Men who could benefit from testosterone might experience symptoms ranging from brain fog and low energy to reduced libido and erectile dysfunction. It can take anywhere from a few weeks to a few months for TRT to make a difference, depending on the symptoms.

When T backfires

In the latest research, endocrinologists looked at data from 200 men who were prescribed testosterone at the university clinic.

They found that only 12% of the men met the criteria for treating low testosterone, confirmed by two blood tests.

That means the other 88% — 176 men — may have been inappropriately given TRT, including some who had sleep apnea or prostate cancer.

On average, the men studied were in their 50s, but some as young as 18 were also prescribed testosterone.

If they don't need it, young men on testosterone could be putting their long-term health at risk, since taking TRT can make it harder for the body to produce its own supply of the hormone over time.

High testosterone levels can also increase the body's volume of red blood cells, a risk factor for high blood pressure that, in extreme cases, may lead to a heart attack or stroke. It can also impair fertility by temporarily reducing sperm count.

And taking T can potentially exacerbate serious health conditions like prostate cancer, potentially fueling tumor growth, per the Mayo Clinic.

The findings are concerning, given how popular testosterone has become in the wellness industry and the potential for misuse without clear guidelines, said study authors Dr. Maria Papaleontiou and Dr. Sophia Sinha, both professors at the University of Michigan.

"Testosterone has been coined as the 'fountain of youth' to optimize performance through enhancing muscle and improving energy levels in social media," they told Business Insider in a joint email interview. "Testosterone therapy can help some people who truly have low testosterone, but it is not risk-free."

Major update coming soon for testosterone therapy guidelines

Doctors understand that this is not a black-and-white issue.

While testosterone treatment can have side effects, low testosterone is also a health concern, Dr. Justin Dubin, director of men's sexual health at Baptist Health Medical Group, told Business Insider.

Dubin, who was not involved in the study, said prescribing TRT outside the guidelines may not always be harmful. Yes, TRT can be overprescribed to men who don't need it, but it is also underprescribed to men who could benefit, Dubin said.

"Guidelines are guidelines, they're not law," Dubin said. "There are gray areas, and we need to give care in the gray. That's where most doctors live and where most patients live."

The benchmark for healthy testosterone is so nuanced, Dubin said, that the American Urological Association has gathered a panel to discuss a major update to its guidelines on treating testosterone deficiency in the coming year or two.

For now, Dubin said the growing popularity of testosterone is a good thing, as it's prompting a more proactive approach to medical care for men, who are notorious for avoiding the doctor's office until there's an emergency. As long as guys are going about it the right way by speaking to their doctor instead of just buying stuff online, he's all for it.

"I think that's a wonderful thing because this is a gateway to men's health. This is how we can access a lot of guys, get them in to learn about their blood pressure, whether they have diabetes, heart disease," he said. "I'm actually excited and hopeful."

• I gave my daughter a "Yes Day" for her 7th birthday.
• The experience showed me how much kids value being trusted.
• Saying yes helped my daughter build confidence and independence.

Parenting young kids often feels like saying no on repeat.

No, not today. No, that's enough. No, maybe later.

So for my daughter's 7th birthday, I decided to try something different. I decided to give her a "Yes day" and say yes to whatever request and desire she had, within resonable boundaries.

I first heard about it years ago, before I became a mom. A good friend told me about an annual tradition in their home called "Kids in charge day," where her children picked the meals, the outings, and the flow of the day.

At the time, I had questions. What if they ask for something unrealistic? What if it gets out of hand?

She told me something I didn't fully appreciate then, but that has stayed with me ever since: kids aren't as impressed with extravagance. What they want is attention, time, and a sense that their voice matters.

We introduced the idea when our daughter was 4, and it quickly became one of her favorite traditions. So this year, we made it her birthday gift, something she already loved, arriving right on time.

I set boundaries, but kept them simple

"Yes" doesn't mean anything goes. For us, it meant choices that were safe, local, and doable within the day. My daughter didn't need endles options. She needed the opportuity to make her own choices.

I let her lead, even when it was uncomforable

Her first request was breakfast: a cream cheese bagel. Easy.

Then came her outfit: red heart socks, faded floral print pants, and an old pink shirt. Something I would've picked out for play or painting, not a birthday outing.

I almost redirected her, but stopped short. "Is that what you want to wear?" I asked.

"Yes," she said, beaming. Confidence is built in moments when kids get to trust their own thinking without being corrected.

The small things seemed to matter most

We headed to National Harbor, just outside of D.C., where she planned to build a bear using gift cards she'd been saving.

When we pulled up, I asked if I could grab a coffee before we got started. "Yes!" she shouted, delighted. That moment surprised me. She wasn't just receiving the yes. She was learning how to give it.

We wandered into a Black-owned bookstore, hand in hand. She picked out a chapter book. Then, just as excitedly, she grabbed a "Gracie's Corner" book, a series she used to love as a toddler and one I was almost certain she'd outgrown.

I almost said no again. Then I remembered the assignment. "Yes. And yes."

I enjoyed watching what she did with the freedom

At Build-A-Bear, she made thoughtful choices. She picked the birthday bear that cost as much as her age so she could spend more on accessories, instead of choosing a more expensive plush that would eat into her budget. I'm not surprised though, my girl loves to save a coin.

By midday, it was "yes, yes, yes." A candy shop stop. A few treats. There was an ice cream counter inside, and after trying a few flavors, she decided on her own to wait until after lunch.

No prompting. No correction. Just her own good judgment. She felt trusted in the moment and rose to the occasion.

I needed to stretch my comfort too

Later, she asked to ride the Capital Wheel. She was ready. I was not.

Her dad had joined us by then, and they walked hand in hand toward the oversized Ferris wheel while I followed a few steps behind, snapping photos. At the ticket booth, my husband asked for three tickets.

"Wait, Mom, you're doing this?!" she asked. I took a breath. "Yes." She squealed.

Sometimes a "Yes Day" isn't just about your child. It's about saying yes to yourself, too. To your own confidence and courage. I know my fear of heights is irrational, but in that moment it felt very real. I was, and still am, proud of myself for pushing through.

She reminded me I deserve yeses too

At the nail salon I typically visit solo, she was treated like royalty. Apple juice in a bejeweled glass. Chocolates at checkout. A cascade of bubbles as we left. We stopped next door at a craft store and picked up stickers and bookmarks.

And then, near the end of the day, she surprised me. She asked if we could go to the makeup store to get something for me. I reminded her it was her day, not mine.

"Yes, but I want to share it with you, Mama."

That night, we ordered cheeseburgers and fries and sat around the table, her legs swinging as she recapped her favorite parts of the day. Proud. Confident. Already just a little bit bigger.

In that moment, my friend's words came back to me. A "Yes Day" isn't about indulgence. It's about intention. It gives your child space to make decisions, feel heard, and trust their voice.

The goal isn't just to say yes for a day. It's to raise kids who know how to use their voice for a lifetime.

• Motherhood changed my perspective on the World Cup.
• The six-week tournament on the global stage creates a tangible connection to heritage.
• It makes memories and deepens relationships between families and across oceans.

It all started with a onesie, as so many parenthood journeys do.

The Ipswich Town Tractor Boys gear traveled across the Atlantic before I snuck it onto my then-infant son, just before my husband arrived home. Adorable photos of the drool-covered shirt followed, sent back across the pond to Ipswich, England, the epicenter of my father-in-law's family.

It was a reason to connect — one that wouldn't have happened without our family's shared love of country and capturing moments that remind us of one another.

The onesie spurred a different reaction when my Belgian grandmother and father saw their pride and joy, the one and only baby wearing the colors of an English football club. "The English?! He should be wearing Red Devil red!" exclaimed my grandmother, with a delivery that bordered on genuine betrayal.

Becoming a parent made me see these interactions between family members as long-lasting connections and pivotal memories, not just silly quips at a sporting event.

Motherhood changed my perspective

By the time of the Women's World Cup later that summer, a lighthearted rivalry had formed (Belgium didn't even qualify that year, but that didn't simmer my family's bubbling pride). My 4'5", 80-pound grandmother had outsize opinions about every decision on the pitch.

Cheering my grandfather on at years of weekend games, she wielded words capable of besting anyone's strongest kick. Other countless memories help fill the multi-year gaps between tournaments, like my grandmother and father-in-law's sheepish chuckles and simultaneous "santé!" and "cheers!" as glasses chinked. Or the audible disbelief at a call that was simply unjust to everyone on the pitch. And, all the proud comments about my son's various traits as evidence of his Belgian or English heritage.

In stark contrast, I can't tell you a thing about prior World Cups. I likely passively watched, enjoying the game, but not for the reasons that matter now.

Multigenerational moments are fleeting

I became a mom, and suddenly the moments on screen were truly part of the background; I was watching the moments in the room.

Motherhood has made me keenly aware of these fleeting multi-generation interactions and how readily they slip away without intention. My dear grandmother died in 2024. I will miss her elegant outrage at the ref's calls and the players' decisions. I know my Dad will represent Belgium in this year's World Cup, complete with a click of the tongue and an exasperated sigh, unwittingly echoing my grandmother's to a tee.

Add in shared culture, country-themed snacks, and friendly competition, and you have cherished memories in the making. I daydream about my rambunctious toddler dashing into the yard to greet his grandfathers, surprising them in his Belgium, England, or even US kit. Jeers will be hurled based on his selection, but so will love and enthusiasm.

The World Cup is a time to connect with our heritage

For my children, this summer is a rare at-home immersion into the cultures that define their grandfathers and of which their great-grandmother was deeply proud.

I imagine US parents living abroad may experience similar feelings on Super Bowl Sunday or during March Madness, but it can't compete with the World Cup. More than 100 games spread over six-ish weeks extends the tradition, winning it the title of my favorite sporting event — an admittedly unexpected statement for an American (who grew up watching the Super Bowl).

This World Cup will ground my children in family legacy, strengthen connections in the present, and create memories and shared interests for the future.

Unlike a book or photos, the stadium's palpable energy, chants and songs, and the homemade family recipes at watch parties make culture easy to grasp — no matter how small the tiny hands. My son will experience why one side of the family wears black, yellow, and red, and the other red and blue, knowing he can feel at home in each.

This will be the first time my son sees Belgium and England play in the World Cup, heightening the rivalry and making the experience more tangible.

The further Belgium, England, the US, (or any other team for which we have a smidgen of affinity) make it, the longer the family connections and memory-making magic — that's what I'm in it for.

• Christina Nicolson is the mother of 11-year-old Landon Nicholson. They live in Wellington, Florida.
• Landon approached her about starting a vending machine business over a year ago.
• Christina, a business owner herself, shares what it's been like so far.

This as-told-to essay is based on a conversation with Christina Nicholson, the mother of Landon Nicholson. It has been edited for length and clarity.

My son, Landon, and I own a vending machine together. We started when he was 10, over a year ago. Landon got the idea for his vending machine business at one of his sister's basketball games. He was helping at the concession stand during a Wellington Wolves tournament and started noticing just how many people wanted snacks and drinks.

That was the moment the lightbulb went off. First, he wanted to have a candy store, and I said, "Let's start smaller."

I'm a business owner, so I was game to do it

Landon has always wanted to make his own money. Maybe it's because he's seen me do it; I started my own media company right after he was born. He's always seen me be my own boss and seen the flexibility that comes with that. To start, we got a book and watched some YouTube videos to learn about it.

First, we had to find a spot for it. He was taking acting lessons at our community center during the summer, and he went to the front desk and asked if they had a vending machine. They said that they used to, but didn't anymore. He said, "Do you want one? That's my business."

They gave him the contact person, and we set up a meeting with the village of Wellington. We put together a proposal that included what we'd put in there and how much we would sell it for, and they okayed it. They had a contract. The agreement was that 26% of the commission would go to them, and Landon and I would split the profits 50/50.

In September of 2024, we bought a vending machine for $1,500 and had it shipped for $843. We also purchased a credit card reader for $385, bought $265 worth of items from Costco, and put $17 in change in the machine to start.

We're still in the hole, but have learned some important lessons

The community center is not very busy. We're not splitting profits yet, but I still think it's been worthwhile.

A big lesson for him was that just because you make money, it doesn't mean it's your money. For example, the first time we went to the vending machine to get money, he was so excited to have all the dollar bills. But I told him that we had to pay the machine off, that 26% goes to the village of Wellington for letting us put our machine in there, and so on. He quickly learned the difference between revenue and profit.

He was also very excited at the beginning of this to go and check on it once a week. He liked to see what needed filling up, what people were liking, and so on. Now, he's not as excited to go. He still enjoys doing it, but that initial excitement has worn off.

I'm being patient with him

Sometimes, you just have to be patient. We're almost there. I encourage him to review the numbers every month; I'll print out the P&L for him to see. He's very impatient, but I remind him that to make a business work, you have to work.

He's learning different business models, how much time they take, and how busy you are going to be. This has been good because of his age; he goes to the community center and checks on it once a week for 15 minutes. He also likes to see what's working. He still asks me every once in a while if he's making money yet.

I wasn't expecting his confidence. It really impressed me. He walked right up to the community center's front desk, asked if they wanted a vending machine, and came home with a business card. I love that he's not afraid. I think this experience will help him with the confidence to start more businesses.

• I traveled to the UK, the Netherlands, and France during my recent European vacation.
• I planned a packed itinerary, and was pleasantly surprised that I fit so much into eight days.
• That said, I wish I'd booked our hotels sooner and done research into customs and security.

Ever since my first trip to France at 18, I've been enamored with Europe.

Don't get me wrong, I love exploring the US, but there's something about leaving the country that helps me dive into vacation mode quickly, since I'm an ocean away from life's daily stressors.

After the COVID-19 pandemic, I started feeling a familiar itch to travel abroad, so we visited France together two years ago. The following year, we upped the ante and headed to two countries: France and Italy.

When it came time to plan our annual vacation this year, I proposed our most ambitious one yet — three European countries in eight days with a travel day tacked onto both ends — then mapped out a whirlwind itinerary that included two full days in London and two and a half days in both Amsterdam and Paris.

It was an adventure of a lifetime, and we packed so much into a short period of time. Still, I made a few mistakes and learned several important lessons along the way.

I didn't do enough research on security and customs protocol

When we traveled from London to Amsterdam on the Eurostar train, it took an hour to get through airport-level security and customs. Since I anticipated a similar experience traveling from Amsterdam to Paris, we arrived at the train station extra early, but there was no security checkpoint.

This minor mistake only cost us an hour of wasted time, but I regretted it. I could've hopped on an earlier train to Paris had I known that traveling from one EU country to another is a lot easier than entering the European Union from the United Kingdom.

With a tight itinerary, minutes and hours matter, so I learned to pay more attention to security requirements during the planning stage.

I waited too long to book one of my hotels

When looking into Amsterdam hotels, I found one in the city center, right near the main train station. I usually book things well in advance, but this time, I took a gamble and waited to see if the prices would drop.

By the time I went to book my preferred hotel, no rooms were available for my travel dates. As it turns out, there were a few big events in town that week, so rooms filled up quickly.

I've had luck finding last-minute deals on Booking.com before, so I took a look and booked another hotel that was a quick train ride away from the city center. Everything worked out, but the experience taught me to always research whether there are major events going on in a city when you're traveling.

After all, you can always book the hotel when you see it, then cancel the reservation and rebook it if prices drop.

I learned you can't see everything in one trip, and you don't have to

When you only have a few days in a city, you're forced to home in on the must-see items on your bucket list rather than seeing every major tourist attraction. For instance, my husband and I aren't into art, so we usually skip art museums and seek out cool architecture, beautiful gardens, and meaningful experiences.

When we first started charting our own course on vacation rather than letting the fear of missing out guide us, we worried that we might regret seeing some of the major sights. But we quickly realized that it's freeing to pick and choose the activities that matter most to you.

In Amsterdam, we could've seen the Anne Frank House since it's a popular tourist spot. Instead, we spent an afternoon at the Heineken Experience in honor of my late father, who adored Heineken.

I don't drink beer, but it was still incredibly rewarding to enjoy an experience that he never got to have himself.

Walking is often the best way to see a city — but don't be a hero

Whenever I travel, I prefer to see new cities on foot rather than spending time (and money) on public transportation.

Since we only had two days in London, my husband and I took the scenic route to Kensington Palace and walked an hour from our hotel.

On a nice day, it would've been a lovely walk through a gorgeous park, but London's weather is unpredictable. It ended up being rainier and windier than we'd expected, making the stroll pretty miserable.

Sure, we could've popped into the nearest train station, but the intermittent rain lulled us into a false sense of security. Next time, I'll hop on a train instead, even if it means missing out on seeing a pretty park.

• Movie theaters are on a comeback tour.
• Gen Z and millennials are driving ticket sales, seeing an average of seven films a year.
• AMC's CEO said "The Odyssey" had the highest first-day ticket sales of any studio release since 2022.

Christopher Nolan's "The Odyssey" is already breaking records, and it hasn't hit theaters yet.

In an X post on Friday, AMC CEO Adam Aron said "The Odyssey" recorded the company's "highest first-day ticket sales for any studio-released movie title since 2022."

"My apologies if you encountered a long ticketing line on the AMC web site and app yesterday," Aron said.

"The Odyssey," based on Homer's Greek epic poem, has seen worldwide excitement since Universal Pictures announced the film adaptation in late 2024. The film's trailer raked in over 120 million views in its first 24 hours, in part due to the star-studded cast.

Matt Damon helms the film as Odysseus, while fans can also expect to see Anne Hathaway, Robert Pattison, Zendaya, Tom Holland, Charlize Theron, Mia Goth, Lupita Nyong'o, and more.

"The Odyssey" comes three years after Nolan struck cinematic gold with "Oppenheimer," which won seven Academy Awards and became a pop culture phenomenon alongside Greta Gerwig's "Barbie."

"The Odyssey" debuts on July 17, but the build-up around ticket sales has been long in the making. In an unusual decision, IMAX announced that it would sell tickets for select screens and showtimes a year in advance. Fans who missed the first ticket drop had another opportunity on Thursday with advanced tickets for premium large-format showtimes.

On X, Aron said the only AMC releases to outpace "The Odyssey" were driven by two musical juggernauts: Beyoncé and Taylor Swift.

"Ironically, the only first-day AMC ticket sales results since 2022 that topped The Odyssey were for our very own music-oriented projects from our own AMC Theatres Distribution, namely first-day ticket sales for the Renaissance concert film from Beyonce in 2023 and our two Taylor Swift efforts in 2023 and again in 2025," Aron said.

Although the COVID-19 pandemic and the streaming revolution dealt a harsh blow to movie theater attendance, it's on the rebound. A Fandango report published in April said Gen Zers and millennials were driving momentum at movie theaters, spending more money and time compared to other generations.

The report said a good slate of films in 2025, the desire for out-of-the-home experiences, and social opportunities drove Gen Zers toward the movies. Both Gen Z and millennials saw an average of seven films in 2025.

"For Gen Z, it is a form of social gathering. For Millennials, it is an escape from daily routine," the report said.

AMC has seen the boost firsthand. On Monday, the company said more than 25 million people attended its theaters in May, marking the highest May attendance since 2019.

"These immensely satisfying results reflect the strength of a diverse film slate, one that was driven both by established blockbusters with their well-known characters along with entirely new IP," Aron said in a press release. "This current measure of success, combined with the many compelling movies coming to our screens in the weeks and months ahead, gives us great confidence as we look to the rest of 2026."

• WalletHub ranked states where people have the highest income, using several different measurements.
• Some states with mega-high earners didn't rank high due their fairly average median incomes.
• California landed outside of the top 10 as many high earners are leaving the state.

The median income in the US is about $83,000 — and you could make more or less than that number depending on where you live. But which states are the highest earning overall?

A new WalletHub study used three income-related measures to rank states: the average annual income of the top 5%, the average annual income of the bottom 20%, and the median annual household income of the state's entire population.

The resulting rankings include some surprises. None of the states known for being home to billionaires, like New York, California, and Florida, took the top spot.

WalletHub analyst Chip Lupo said New York's income disparity is a reason it came up just short of the No. 1 ranking. While the top 5% makes a lot, the state's middle class isn't making nearly as much.

"In terms of just the median annual income, which I think is what most people are interested in as far as that's a reflection of the middle class, New York is a little above average in terms of its median annual income at $96,000," Lupo told Business Insider.

One state that barely cracked the top 15 is California; a state known for movie stars and moguls. Lupo posited that the Golden State's lower ranking on the list may have been impacted by several top earners leaving.

"What's going on in California also is the number of high-wealth individuals that are fleeing the state," Lupo said. "A lot of wealth is moving out of the state and into more tax-friendly states like Texas, Florida, and Tennessee. So that's a huge driver."

Read on for the 15 states where people have the highest income, according to WalletHub.

15. Florida

Total score: 49.89

Average annual income of top 5%: $507,073

Median annual income: $75,737

Average annual income of bottom 20%: $16,378

14. Georgia

Total score: 52.76

Average annual income of top 5%: $516,260

Median annual income: $72,437

Average annual income of bottom 20%: $17,301

13. California

Total score: 53.45

Average annual income of top 5%: $482,584

Median annual income: $133,974

Average annual income of bottom 20%: $14,662

12. District of Columbia

Total score: 54.11

Average annual income of top 5%: $488,074

Median annual income: $174,287

Average annual income of bottom 20%: $9,579

11. Texas

Total score: 54.93

Average annual income of top 5%: $520,378

Median annual income: $75,905

Average annual income of bottom 20%: $17,651

10. Massachusetts

Total score: 57.11

Average annual income of top 5%: $498,062

Median annual income: $137,563

Average annual income of bottom 20%: $14,440

9. Illinois

Total score: 57.88

Average annual income of top 5%: $533,840

Median annual income: $83,277

Average annual income of bottom 20%: $16,813

8. Minnesota

Total score: 58.66

Average annual income of top 5%: $500,074

Median annual income: $90,632

Average annual income of bottom 20%: $20,662

7. Colorado

Total score: 59.65

Average annual income of top 5%: $498,587

Median annual income: $106,187

Average annual income of bottom 20%: $19,588

6. Utah

Total score: 61.24

Average annual income of top 5%: $475,515

Median annual income: $98,858

Average annual income of bottom 20%: $24,307

5. Connecticut

Total score: 64.73

Average annual income of top 5%: $543,016

Median annual income: $122,032

Average annual income of bottom 20%: $15,095

4. Washington

Total score: 65.23

Average annual income of top 5%: $522,328

Median annual income: $112,933

Average annual income of bottom 20%: $19,082

3. New Jersey

Total score: 66.08

Average annual income of top 5%: $527,376

Median annual income: $125,766

Average annual income of bottom 20%: $17,418

2. New York

Total score: 66.27

Average annual income of top 5%: $585,523

Median annual income: $96,746

Average annual income of bottom 20%: $13,633

1. Virginia

Total score: 67.57

Average annual income of top 5%: $545,097

Median annual income: $95,339

Average annual income of bottom 20%: $19,671

• Neither high school relationships nor Hollywood relationships are known for longevity.
• But these 19 celebrity couples met as teens, and many of them are still together today.
• Knicks star Jalen Brunson met his wife, Ali, when they were in high school.

Even in the most stable environment, it's hard to maintain a relationship that moves from high school to the real world.

Now imagine doing it as a celebrity.

Nevertheless, these 19 couples all met as high schoolers (or in some cases, even earlier), and made it work for years after, even if not all of them are still together today.

Here are 19 celebrity couples who met back when they were just regular teenagers.

Jalen Brunson and Ali Marks

The Knicks superstar has been dating his wife, Ali Marks, since high school — their 2015 prom photo is still on his Instagram, captioned, "Went to prom with the best date anyone could ask for."

They got engaged in 2022 and married in 2023.

"She's always been by my side and I'm lucky to have her," Brunson told People after the big day.

In a nod to their long relationship, Marks wore her prom dress as her second look at the wedding.

They welcomed their first child, Jordyn, in 2024.

Patrick and Brittany Mahomes

The 2023 Super Bowl champion has been with Brittany, his now-wife, since they were classmates in Tyler, Texas.

In 2020, Patrick proposed to Brittany, captioning an Instagram post with "#RingSZN." A few days later, the couple revealed they were expecting their first child together. Their daughter, Sterling, was born in February 2021.

They married in March 2022. Their second child, a boy named Patrick "Bronze" Lavon Mahomes III, was born in November 2022. Their third baby, Golden, was born in January 2025.

Brittany and Sterling were at the stadium to watch the Chiefs quarterback win his second Super Bowl in February 2023.

Snoop Dogg and Shante Broadus

Their first son, Cordé, was born in 1994, and they were married three years later in 1997. Snoop even shared an adorable throwback shot of the two at prom on Instagram. The ups and downs of their marriage were all documented on their reality TV show, "Snoop Dogg's Father Hood."

The couple filed for divorce in 2004, but reconciled and renewed their vows in 2008.

According to VH1, Snoop told Queen Latifah in 2013 that "[he] had no understanding of how I was hurting her and how I was betraying myself, until I [realized] I need to love this woman who loves me and had my kids. [I needed to] put my life in perspective and let my music and my business become secondary."

Lin-Manuel Miranda and Vanessa Nadal

Miranda and Nadal attended the same New York City high school, but they never actually spoke — though that didn't stop Miranda from developing a crush on his future wife.

"She was gorgeous and I'm famously bad at talking to women I find attractive. I have a total lack of game," Miranda told The New York Times in 2010.

They reconnected on Facebook years later, after they both graduated from college. They tied the knot in September 2010. They now have two sons.

Jeff Daniels and Kathleen Treado

Daniels and Treado grew up in Chelsea, Michigan, and met in high school. They've been together ever since. Throughout his highly successful career, the couple still call Chelsea their home, and they raised their three kids there.

In 2014, Daniels told MLive about why he chose to stay close to home rather than move out to industry hubs Los Angeles or New York City, saying, "[Chelsea] was home. Kathleen and I had both been raised here; good enough for us, good enough for them."

LeBron James and Savannah Brinson

Brinson told Harper's Bazaar in 2010 about their first date at Outback, calling it "basic," but she shared that it was also when she knew he loved her.

"I knew he loved me when I left my leftovers from dinner in his car," Brinson said. "I'd totally forgotten about them, and he brought them to me. I think he just wanted another excuse to come and see me."

Brinson became pregnant with their first child, Bronny, while she was still in high school, and she was nervous that it would derail their lives, but James assured her that everything would be OK.

James finally proposed to his longtime girlfriend in 2011, after 10 years of dating, per the Los Angeles Times. They tied the knot in 2014. They also had two more kids.

LL Cool J and Simone Smith

LL Cool J shared the story of how he met his wife during an interview on "Jimmy Kimmel Live."

The rapper told Kimmel in 2012 that he "was just 19, something like that," when he was driving down the block on Easter Sunday. His friend asked him if he wanted to meet one of his friend's cousins, and once he got a look at Smith, he told his friend, "Oh yeah, I'll meet your cousin."

Smith recalled she was 17 years old when they met. The pair married in 1995 after dating for 8 years, and they have 4 kids together.

Bono and Ali Hewson

Bono and Hewson met when they were teenagers at school. Hewson played hard to get, since she didn't want to be known as "just another of Bono's girls," but eventually his pursuit of her was successful.

Their first date culminated with him walking her to the bus stop, per the Huffington Post.

The U2 star has called their relationship "a magic carpet ride." She "sees me as a figure of amusement," said Bono while speaking to The Sun.

Kendrick Lamar and Whitney Alford

The "Not Like Us" rapper is pretty private about his personal life, but we know that he met his fiancée when they were both high schoolers in Compton, California, according to Billboard.

"She's been here since day one," Lamar said of Alford in a 2014 New York Times Magazine profile.

They got engaged in 2015 and have two children together. The entire family appears on the cover of his fifth album, "Mr. Morale & the Big Steppers" in 2022.

Steph and Ayesha Curry

Even though they're basketball's golden couple, Ayesha had never even attended a game until she was 19 — five years after she met her future-husband Steph, ABC News reported.

The two met as teenagers in Charlotte, North Carolina. They never officially dated when they were that young, but according to Ayesha, they'd talk on the phone sometimes. "It was that shy middle school, high school stuff," she said.

When the basketball star was flown out to Los Angeles for the ESPY Awards, his first thought was of his childhood crush. They met up, saw the sights, and the rest is history.

Now, he's widely regarded as one of the greatest basketball players in the game, and she's turned herself into a brand. Ayesha has written cookbooks, opened a barbecue restaurant, hosted a cooking show on the Food Network called "Ayesha's Home Kitchen," and founded a skincare brand called Sweet July.

They welcomed their fourth child in 2024.

Jon Bon Jovi and Dorothea Hurley

People reported the couple met at Sayreville War Memorial High School in their New Jersey hometown, and have been together ever since. They have four kids together.

At the peak of Bon Jovi's fame in 1989, the couple decided to elope in Las Vegas and were married by an Elvis impersonator. And though Bon Jovi has die-hard fans, Hurley isn't concerned.

"I think it's great they love the music," she told People in 2016.

Ron Howard and Cheryl Alley

Even though getting married young (they were both 21) might seem like a risky endeavor, these two have beaten the odds, successfully navigating Hollywood and parenthood.

"I felt really lucky when we met. It's crazy — we were teenagers, it shouldn't have worked. We got married young, that shouldn't have worked either, and yet it really and truly has," Howard told the Huffington Post about his decades-long marriage to Alley in 2013.

And now their kids are famous, too — their daughter, Bryce Dallas Howard, starred in the "Jurassic World" franchise and regularly directs episodes of the "Star Wars" TV shows.

Thomas Rhett and Lauren Akins

While they had known each other since they were kids (since first grade, to be exact, according to Country Living), Rhett and Akins didn't start dating until they were teenagers — and it didn't stick at first. The two broke up soon after, and actually almost both married other people, according to People.

But thankfully (for Rhett), Akins broke up with her boyfriend, and Rhett "moved in for the kill." They dated for six months and married in 2013, when they were both 22. They now have four daughters and a son, born in 2026.

Ja Rule and Aisha Atkins

According to Ja Rule, the two have been together since middle school. He told Ebony magazine in 2002 that "the first time I met her I was getting off the school bus, and she was the new girl in school." 

The couple were married in 2001 and have three kids together.

Besides dealing with the normal issues that couples go through and constantly being scrutinized by the media, they also had to spend almost two years apart while Ja Rule was in prison for tax evasion and illegal gun possession. He was released in 2013, per TMZ.

Mariano and Clara Rivera

Famed baseball player Rivera met his wife in elementary school, and the pair have been together ever since, The New York Times reported.

They were married in Panama in 1991, and they lived there until 2000, when they moved to Westchester County, New York.

Eminem and Kim Scott

Their long and tumultuous relationship began when they were just kids.

Even if you have just cursory knowledge about Eminem, you know about Kim, the subject of many of the rapper's most disturbing songs, like "Kim," and "'97 Bonnie and Clyde."

The two met when they were just kids (she was 13 and he was 15). Kim and her twin, Dawn, had previously run away from an allegedly abusive home, and eventually began living with Eminem and his mother.

In 1995, they welcomed their daughter Hailie (the subject of more Eminem songs), and were married in 1999.

But things quickly went downhill — Eminem was accused of pistol-whipping a man he claimed he saw kissing his wife, according to NME. The charge was dropped in favor of a reduced charge of carrying a concealed weapon, and he was sentenced to two years' probation. The couple divorced in 2001.

Five years later, they shocked the world and remarried. But just three months after that, the rapper filed for divorce. Their second divorce was finalized in 2006, per People.

Though Eminem built his brand around graphic songs, he apologized to his former wife on the track "Bad Husband" from his 2017 album, "Revival."

Joey Fatone and Kelly Baldwin

Fatone and Baldwin had been dating for 10 years and had a daughter together in 2001 before they were married in 2004, per People. Their second daughter was born in 2010.

Their relationship was plagued with rumors of infidelity from outlets such as Page Six, reaching a high in 2013 after his appearances on two seasons of "Dancing with the Stars." At the time, when Baldwin was asked for a comment, she simply responded, "I don't really want to talk about this."

In 2020, Fatone confirmed to Us Weekly that they were getting divorced.

Robin Thicke and Paula Patton

Thicke and Patton's 21-year-long relationship began when they were 16.

Thicke told Essence in 2011 that their relationship began when they were teenagers, and Patton was "the president of the Black student union and [Thicke] was just a silly white boy."

But they had actually met a year prior at a teen club where, according to Thicke, he serenaded his future wife with the Stevie Wonder song "Jungle Fever."

They were together for 21 years and married for nine before filing for divorce in 2014 and engaging in a particularly nasty custody battle for their son, Julian.

Misha Collins and Victoria Vantoch

Collins and Vantoch got married in 2001, though they met way back in high school — Collins was the only boy in one of Vantoch's English classes.

The two separated at some point before 2021. He acknowledged the split in the author's note in his poetry book, "Some Things I Still Can't Tell You."

• As a kid, Brian Winch helped his father clean parking lots to support their family.
• Years later, he turned it into a business, and his brothers joined in.
• Now, he helps others learn about "America's Simplest Business," carrying on his dad's legacy.

This as-told-to essay is based on a conversation with Brian Winch, the founder of Clean Lots. The following has been edited for length and clarity.

As a young kid, I watched my parents work hard to keep food on the table. What is now called picking up a few side hustles was then just a way of life: they'd head to second, or even third jobs, to ensure we could make ends meet.

As one of three boys, once we became teenagers, we found ourselves helping too. So, it wasn't a surprise when my dad told me we were going to head out at the crack of dawn to clean trash from business parking lots.

While some kids today might hate everything about this, that wasn't how I was raised. My parents never complained about their lot as poor, working-class people doing what they needed to do. And I far from hated it. In fact, I found it peaceful to wake up early, watch the sunrise, and help a business owner clear their parking lot so it looked fresh and clean when their customers arrived.

Better yet, I was with my dad, something most 12-year-olds love deep down.

My father inspired me to start a simple business

My Dad's name was Joseph Winch, and he was a World War II refugee immigrant from Poland to where I grew up, in Calgary. He'd worked on the kill floor at a meatpacking plant when he got here. He'd laid track for the railroad. He'd been a hospital orderly.

When I was 21, my father died suddenly. I didn't have time to tell him that while my friends headed for other careers, I was secretly considering following his footsteps.

Deep in grief but motivated to make a path for myself, I started reaching out to properties to offer cleanup services. I established Winch Janitorial Services, which later became Winch Enterprises.

I now run Clean Lots, where I am also an author, educating others on what I call "America's Simplest Business." In a tech-fueled world, it's one that has remained AI-proof, as no robot can, as of now, truly scour the entire property for every little cigarette butt in the bushes and hard-to-reach places.

Around 45 years later, I'm not only proud of the career I've built helping others, but grateful I pursued my father's legacy over those other career options.

My family works alongside me

A few years into my janitorial career, where I'd make sure every last piece of trash was out of the bushes and owners knew if any fresh graffiti had been added to their buildings overnight, my two twin brothers started getting involved.

They both helped with their specific talents: the one who operated a forklift helped with cleanup, and the other focused on the project bidding and outreach.

We scaled to over $700,000 per year. Working with my brothers has gone better than some would expect — in fact, it's a way to keep the family together through the years.

But the family member I didn't expect to feel walking alongside me was my dad. Some days, I can sense his presence in the parking lots right next to me.

I've even heard him speaking to me in my head: "Brian, take a few steps that way." Once, I followed this voice and found a wallet. At first, I thought I was crazy, but that day I realized how real it is.

I want to help others find the same success in a simple business

After building my career, I realized I wanted to mentor others through their own business builds in this industry.

One high school teacher in Chicago built his business to make money during the summers off and, after partnering with some buddies, grew it to operate in multiple states.

Through these stories, I realized my father's legacy — and now my own — was never about trash; it was about being of service to others.

• Several restaurant chains have shared plans to close locations in 2026.
• Wendy's planned to close up to 350 US restaurants in the first six months of the year.
• Pizza Hut said it would shutter 250 US locations in the first half of the year.

Some fast-food and fast-casual chains across the US are shrinking their footprints, with several planning to scale back locations in 2026.

Restaurant chains, including Wendy's, Papa John's, Pizza Hut, and Red Lobster, have announced plans to close locations in 2026.

The planned closures come amid a challenging few years for restaurant chains, driven by factors such as inflation, rising labor costs, and changing customer preferences. Some brands have leaned on value meals and innovations in an attempt to bring more customers in the door.

"What's really worked within quick service hasn't been value, as much," TD Cowen analyst Andrew Charles previously told Business Insider. "Value is important, but you look at when McDonald's, Burger King, etc, have done well — it's really when they have great menu innovation or great marketing that they really see customers respond."

Several restaurant chains have announced plans to close locations in 2026, while others have suddenly shuttered locations since the start of the year. Here's what to know.

In February, Wendy's revealed plans to close up to 350 US restaurants.

In February, Wendy's said it intended to close roughly 5% to 6% of its US footprint — about 298 to 358 restaurants — in the first half of the year as it grappled with sliding sales and profits.

At the time, then-Interim CEO Ken Cook said the brand's focus was "to strengthen our foundation and position Wendy's for long-term success."

The Associated Press reported that Wendy's shuttered 28 restaurants in the fourth quarter of 2025, leaving it with 5,969 locations across the US at the end of the year.

Company data shows systemwide US sales dropped 5.2% in 2025, while same-store sales declined 5.6% compared with the previous year.

In May, Wendy's announced that global systemwide sales totaled $3.2 billion in Q1, down 5.5% from the same period the previous year. In a statement at the time, Cook remained optimistic, citing Q1 improvements such as upgrading its hamburgers, launching new chicken sandwiches, and a "focus on operational excellence."

"While our first quarter results reflect a business in the early stages of a turnaround, we are making progress to improve our US business and are confident in the direction we are heading," he said.

Pizza Hut said it intended to shutter 250 US locations in the first half of the year.

Pizza Hut, founded in 1958 by brothers Dan and Frank Carney in Wichita, Kansas, and best-known for its pan pizza, has more than 6,000 locations in the US.

In a February earnings call, its parent company, Yum! Brands, said Pizza Hut intended to shutter 250 US locations by July 1. The closures would impact "underperforming" locations, Yum! Brands said.

In April, Fortune reported it had identified around 50 locations that had closed, with most affected restaurants in California, Pennsylvania, and Ohio.

Yum! Brands said late last year that it was exploring a potential sale of the chain, after reporting a 1% decline in same-store sales during the third quarter, the eighth consecutive quarterly drop. Citing a source, Reuters reported in May that Yum! was in talks with LongRange Capital, a private-equity firm, about a potential sale.

"The Pizza Hut team has been working hard to address business and category challenges," Chris Turner, chief executive of Yum! Brands, said in November. "However, Pizza Hut's performance indicates the need to take additional action to help the brand realize its full value, which may be better executed outside Yum! Brands."

The chain has faced tough competition from other chains, especially with the rise of value meals. Internationally, it is faring better, with same-store sales increasing by 1% last year.

Jack in the Box reportedly plans to close up to 100 locations.

Jack in the Box — the fast-food chain that's been flipping burgers since 1951 — has built a following at its more than 2,100 locations with a menu that includes curly fries, tacos, chicken sandwiches, and milkshakes. But even this drive-thru staple has hit some bumps in the road.

In 2025, the company rolled out its "Jack on Track" turnaround plan to boost performance and strengthen its finances. Part of this was selling off Del Taco for $119 million, which was completed in December.

By the end of June, the brand expects 50 to 100 closures and around 20 openings, QSR Magazine reported in February.

Same-store sales across its restaurants dropped 6.7% in Q1 year over year, the company reported, according to QSR Magazine. Its fiscal second-quarter sales "did not meet expectations," Interim CEO Mark King said in May, with same-store sales falling 3.8% year over year and revenue declining 4.3% to $254.3 million.

But, King said, sales trends had improved entering the third quarter and that the company was committed to its turnaround plan.

"Jack in the Box is an iconic brand, and I'm eager to dive in with our passionate team and franchisees to further improve operating results. After being on the Board and now as interim CEO, my excitement for the potential of this brand has only grown," he said.

The brand's goal this year is to focus on innovation, customer service, cosmetic updates, and fewer, stronger limited-time offers, QSR reported.

Papa John's plans to close approximately 200 stores in 2026.

Papa John's announced in a February earnings call that it plans to close about 200 North America restaurants in 2026 as part of a broader effort to shut down 300 underperforming locations by the end of 2027.

The closures will primarily affect franchise-owned stores that are more than 10 years old and do not indicate long-term profitability, Ravi Thanawala, Papa John's CFO, said on the call.

Papa John's reported a 3% decline in global systemwide sales in the first quarter. North America comparable sales declined 6.4%, though international comparable sales rose 3.6% for the sixth consecutive quarter of growth.

CEO Todd Penegor said, "We are taking action to better align corporate and field resources with our transformation priorities and optimize spans and layers in our organizations."

Papa John's was founded in 1984 by John Schnatter in Jeffersonville, Indiana, when he began selling pizzas out of a converted broom closet in his father's tavern. The brand quickly grew into one of the largest pizza chains in the world, known for its "Better Ingredients. Better Pizza." slogan.

Red Robin has abruptly closed some restaurants nationwide.

Some Red Robin locations in Illinois, California, and New Jersey abruptly closed this year, The Independent reported.

The company, which has nearly 500 locations across the United States, said in February 2025 that it intended to shutter roughly 70 underperforming restaurants as part of a plan to pay down debt, USA Today reported.

Later in the year, executives shared during an earnings call that turnaround efforts at several locations had been more successful than expected, reducing the need for as many closures.

A Red Robin spokesperson told Business Insider in March that 20 closures in 2026 were mentioned on the company's Q4 earnings call; however, these are potential, not confirmed, closures. They concern corporate locations, rather than franchise-operated locations.

"As the company reported in its Q4 earnings, Red Robin beat the casual dining industry on traffic in December, a trend that continued into January," the spokesperson said, adding that there was "a lift in traffic, thanks to its new value menu, the Big YUMMM Deals starting at $9.99."

"This gives the company confidence as they look ahead and expect to continue that progress in 2026 as they introduce more guests to the new-and-improved Red Robin," the spokesperson said.

Red Robin was founded in 1969 in Seattle, Washington, when local restaurateur Gerry Kingen expanded and renamed a neighborhood tavern that had originally opened in the 1940s.

The company grew into a national casual-dining chain known for its gourmet burgers, its Bottomless Steak Fries, onion rings, and thick, hand-spun milkshakes.

Some Denny's have also closed without advance notice.

Denny's, which operates more than 1,650 locations globally and is recognized for comfort-food staples, confirmed in January that it had completed its plan to close 150 restaurants by the end of 2025.

Since the start of 2026, there have been reports of restaurants closing without advance notice, including locations in Grand Rapids and Kalamazoo, Michigan, as well as Midland, Texas, per Mashed.

Denny's did not respond to Business Insider's request for comment on the recent closures. It has not been said if there will be others this year.

It comes amid broader corporate shifts at the company. In January, a $620 million acquisition by TriArtisan Capital, Yadav Enterprises, and Treville Capital was completed. The company reported that CEO Kelli Valade would leave in February.

Denny's was founded in 1953 in Lakewood, California, by Harold Butler and Richard Jezak, originally operating under the name Danny's Donuts before evolving into a full-service coffee shop and eventually rebranding as Denny's.

Noodles & Company expects to close between 30 and 35 locations in 2026.

Fast Company reported Noodles & Company plans to shutter more restaurants as part of a broader effort to shore up its finances.

In a January announcement, the fast-casual chain said it expects to close between 30 and 35 locations in 2026 to improve profitability and strengthen its overall performance.

By the end of 2025, the brand operated 340 company-owned restaurants and 83 franchised locations. The company had already downsized its footprint the previous year, closing 42 restaurants, including 33 corporate locations and nine franchise units.

"Decisions like this are made thoughtfully and with a long-term view of the business," CEO and President Joe Christina said, adding that fourth-quarter results showed stronger performance when resources were focused on higher-opportunity restaurants. He said the moves are designed to bolster the brand's financial position and support long-term, profitable growth.

Noodles & Company was founded in 1995 by Aaron Kennedy in Denver, Colorado. The chain is known for its diverse menu that spans flavors from around the world, including Wisconsin Mac & Cheese, Pad Thai, Japanese Pan Noodles, and Pasta Fresca. In addition to noodle bowls, the restaurant offers soups, salads, and shareable sides, positioning itself as a quick-service spot for comfort food with an international twist.

Red Lobster is closing its Times Square flagship location, among others, in 2026.

Since filing for bankruptcy in 2024 — and closing dozens of restaurants that year — Red Lobster has begun a turnaround: It's appointed a new CEO, updated its menu, collaborated with celebrities, and exited Chapter 11 protection. The new CEO, Damola Adamolekun, told The Wall Street Journal in February that its sales were up 10% year over year.

Still, the company announced this week that it will shutter its flagship Times Square location on June 14, ending a 23-year run in one of the world's busiest tourist destinations.

A spokesperson for Red Lobster told Business Insider the chain "remains focused on strengthening the business, investing in the guest experience, and building momentum across the system."

It cited "extensive and prolonged construction" at the sprawling location, which affected foot traffic and sales.

"Times Square has been an important chapter in Red Lobster's history, and we are grateful to the team members and guests who have made this restaurant special over the years," the chain said.

In May, the brand closed its oldest continuously operating location, in Tallahassee, Florida, after 56 years, following typical performance and lease reviews, the company said. Other closures have included restaurants in Chambersburg, Pennsylvania, and Overland Park, Kansas.

Red Lobster operates around 550 restaurants, a decline from around 700 a few years ago, Fortune reported. Adamolekun told The Wall Street Journal that Red Lobster is still looking closely at leases, with a view to close or update underperforming locations. He added that the chain is also open to opening more locations in some underrepresented regions.

Founded in 1968, Red Lobster grew into one of the largest casual dining seafood chains in the United States. The company is best known for its seafood-focused menu, including shrimp, lobster, and crab dishes, as well as its signature Cheddar Bay Biscuits, which have become a staple of the brand.

• I made both Guy Fieri's and Gordon Ramsay's 10-minute burgers. 
• Fieri's recipe is simpler than Ramsay's, which features far more ingredients. 
• Both burgers tasted delicious, but Fieri's took the top spot in my celebrity-chef showdown.

Guy Fieri and Gordon Ramsay both have 10-minute burger recipes, so I decided it was time for a little showdown.

Ramsay's bacon cheeseburger recipe is featured in his "Ramsay in 10" cookbook, and Fieri himself gave me his burger recipe when I asked for his top burger tips. 

"This may be a more complicated answer than you bargained for, because it's not just about a burger recipe," Fieri told me. "It's about the execution of the whole deal. You can get down with whatever toppings you want, but the basics have to be covered." 

I whipped up both recipes at home to decide who truly had the best — and quickest — burger. Here's how it went.

Fieri's burger is all about classic ingredients.

To make Fieri's perfect burger at home, you'll need: 

• Ground beef (Fieri recommends 80% lean, 20% fat)
• American cheese slices 
• Brioche buns 
• Lettuce
• Tomato 
• Onion 
• Pickles

And there's very little prep.

Fieri told me it's important to shred the lettuce, slice your tomato, and "cut those white onions so thin that they only have one side." 

I also buttered the brioche buns and popped them into the oven so they could get nice and toasty, per Fieri's recommendation.

Then I made my patties.

I seasoned my ground beef with salt and pepper, then shaped it into balls. 

Once my patties were ready, I threw one on the griddle and smashed it with a spatula.

Fieri said it was essential that I cook my burgers "on the hottest griddle or cast iron pan you can get." 

"You smash it down hard — we're talking a half-inch thick," he added.

The Mayor of Flavortown also told me it was important to let my patty crisp up to "get all that delicious caramelization going." I waited until the edges of my patty got crunchy before flipping it over.

After flipping my patty, I added the cheese.

Fieri loves using American cheese slices on burgers because "they melt really well," he told me. 

Next, it was time for Fieri's special cheese-melting trick.

First, I sprayed some water around my burger. Then, per Fieri's instructions, I had to place "some sort of dome or metal bowl" over my patty. 

"That steam will melt your cheese before you overcook your burger," he said. 

I didn't have a metal bowl on hand, so I used an old Marie Callender's pie tin I found in my parents' kitchen. 

My cheese melted perfectly.

Look at how beautiful it is!

Constructing my burger was super easy.

I placed my patty on the bottom bun, then added the tomato, onion slices, and pickles. I placed the shredded lettuce on the top bun and voilà — I was done! 

Fieri's burger tasted just as good as it looked.

What impressed me the most about Fieri's burger was how juicy it tasted, with just the right amount of crispiness. The perfectly cooked patty truly stood on its own; it didn't even need any condiments!

The brioche bun added a nice hint of sweetness, and the beautifully melted cheese tasted almost buttery. The burger was pure perfection. 

Read my full review of Guy Fieri's perfect burger here. 

Ramsay's burger has quite a few more ingredients than Fieri's.

To make Ramsay's cheeseburgers at home, you'll need: 

• Ground beef
• Brioche buns 
• Cheddar cheese
• Egg yolks
• Frozen red chile
• Tomato 
• Onion 
• Bacon
• Little Gem lettuce 
• Mayonnaise 
• Sriracha 

First, I prepped my burgers.

I added 16 ounces of ground beef to a bowl along with two egg yolks. I sprinkled some salt and freshly ground black pepper on top, plus one grated frozen chile. 

After mixing everything by hand, I made four patties, each about 1 inch thick. 

"Remember that the thicker you make the patties, the longer they will take to cook," Ramsay writes in his cookbook. "So if you want these on the table in under 10, press your burgers until they are a little thinner for a quicker cooking time."

I drizzled vegetable oil on my griddle and threw my patties on top.

I let my patties cook for four minutes over medium-high heat, seasoning them with more salt and pepper. Never forget to season!

After adding my bacon and onion slices, I increased the heat to high and let everything cook together.  

I prepped Ramsay's special sauce as my burgers cooked.

I mixed four tablespoons of mayonnaise with two teaspoons of Sriracha, plus some salt and pepper. 

I also toasted my buns and prepped my veggies.

I washed some gem lettuce leaves and sliced one tomato for the bottom of my burgers.

I also toasted my buns in the oven for about two minutes.

I flipped the burgers, bacon, and onions, and let them cook for another five minutes.

I took the bacon and onion slices off the griddle first, placing them on a plate lined with a paper towel.

Ramsay and Fieri use the same trick to melt cheese.

Ramsay also covers the patties to help the cheese melt. But, unlike the Mayor of Flavortown, he doesn't spray the burger with water first. 

Per Ramsay's recipe, I added some butter to the griddle, placed the cheese slices on top of my patties, then covered both with a metal bowl.

The cheese melted beautifully.

This is such an easy trick and clearly worked well for both Fieri's and Ramsay's burgers. I now consider it an essential step for making a great cheeseburger at home. 

Once my patties were ready, I built my burgers.

First, I spread some of Ramsay's Sriracha mayonnaise on my bottom buns. Then I added the lettuce, tomato, and onion slices, along with my cheeseburger and bacon. 

After I threw a few more onion slices on top and spread more sauce on my top buns, my burger was ready to go. 

Ramsay's burger looked straight out of a restaurant.

There's no denying how impressive this burger looks, and it tasted great, too. The patty was plump and juicy, and I loved the kick of heat from the Sriracha mayonnaise and grated chile. 

The bacon and onion also gave some nice crunch and savoriness, while the tomato and lettuce added a dose of freshness. 

Read my full review of Gordon Ramsay's perfect burger here.

Both Fieri and Ramsay have fantastic burgers, but the Mayor of Flavortown takes my top spot.

You have to keep track of quite a few steps to make Ramsay's burger happen in 10 minutes. Fieri's recipe is far simpler, and still delivers fantastic results. 

Plus, I couldn't believe Fieri's burger tasted so good without any sauce or condiments. I've found his burger to outshine those I've had from places like Five Guys, and it's comparable to the gourmet burgers I've tried all over New York — for a fraction of the cost. 

But at the end of the day, you really can't go wrong with Fieri or Ramsay. Either way, you're going to have one very delicious burger. 

• Worchihan Zingkhai is a lifelong football fan, but seeing the World Cup in person felt out of reach.
• He lives in a town in northeast India where salaries are low. He'd been saving up for a new laptop.
• Instead, he pooled his earnings to afford two World Cup tickets in Atlanta. He has no regrets.

This as-told-to essay is based on a conversation with Worchihan Zingkhai, 40, a content creator from a village in Manipur, India. The conversation has been edited for length and clarity.

I've loved football for as long as I can remember.

Growing up in a village in Manipur, in northeast India, football is everywhere. We don't have proper equipment, so we make footballs out of plastic and old clothes rolled into a ball.

I can still remember staying awake until 3 a.m. to watch my first World Cup in 1998. We had one black-and-white TV for the entire village, and we pooled money to buy fuel for a generator to power it.

Since then, I've watched every World Cup on television. I became a fan of Portugal and later followed the Premier League. However, attending a World Cup match in person always felt impossible.

Now, nearly 30 years later, I'm finally going.

The laptop will have to wait

Making this trip requires a lot more than buying a match ticket.

My village sits about 5,600 feet above sea level, and there isn't an airport nearby. I'll drive about six hours to Imphal before flying to New Delhi, London, Washington, DC, and finally Atlanta. The trip includes four flights and about 27 hours in the air.

The journey would have been much harder without help from my wife's family. My father-in-law paid for our flights from New Delhi to Washington, DC, and my in-laws are helping with accommodations in the US. Having family there has made the trip much more affordable.

Even with that support, I've had to make sacrifices financially.

I'm a content creator who makes videos for YouTube, Instagram, and Facebook. This year, I planned to buy a new laptop for video editing. I was looking at models that cost between $2,200 and $2,500.

However, I couldn't afford both the laptop and the World Cup trip, so the laptop will have to wait.

In my area, people often earn about 500 rupees a day, or roughly $5 to $6. Because of that, we're very careful about spending. My family has cut back on other purchases and avoided additional trips to help make this World Cup journey possible.

I missed my first chance at tickets

Getting a World Cup ticket was harder than I expected.

I entered FIFA's ticket sale in February with a budget of $350 per ticket. My dream was to watch Portugal, England, or Argentina.

When I finally got into the system, I had only 15 minutes to buy. The Portugal tickets I wanted were priced between $450 and $650, which was beyond my budget. I spent too much time comparing options and eventually lost my chance.

I thought that was the end of my chance at the World Cup.

I was able to buy tickets in April. This time, I focused on finding a match I could afford instead of chasing the teams I wanted to see most. After waiting in the queue for several hours, I finally got in and bought two category-three tickets for Czech Republic versus South Africa in Atlanta for $140 each — one for me and one for my father-in-law.

High ticket prices make it harder for fans

I understand why demand for the World Cup is so high. Still, I think ticket prices are difficult for ordinary fans.

What frustrates me most is the resale market.

I paid $140 for my ticket. A few weeks later, I checked the resale platform and saw nearby seats listed for about $560.

As a football fan, that's disappointing.

People who genuinely want to attend have a short window to buy tickets, but resellers have much more time to profit from them. I believe some people purchase tickets mainly to resell them rather than attend matches themselves.

For fans like me, that makes an already expensive event even harder to reach.

• Stacy Lentz has co-owned the Stonewall Inn with three others since 2006.
• She went into credit card debt to buy the Inn, and has never made much money.
• Owning it has been the responsibility of a lifetime, and given her purpose, she says.

This as-told-to essay is based on a conversation with Stacy Lentz, co-owner of the Stonewall Inn and CEO of the Stonewall Inn Gives Back Initiative. It has been edited for length and clarity.

I grew up middle-class, in the middle of a cornfield, in the middle-of-nowhere Kansas. That's a lot of middles, but once I moved to New York City in my 20s, I felt like I had discovered the center of the world.

I probably knew that I was gay since I was younger, but I fought it. I went to school with the same 16 kids each year. I knew that I tended to develop crushes on my friends who were girls. As for the guys, I wanted to be their best friends, but had no desire to date them.

At 24, I walked into my first gay bar in New York and immediately thought, "Oh, these are my people."

I took on credit card debt to buy the Stonewall Inn

After that, I spent a lot of time in LGBTQ+ bars. There was a piano bar three buildings down from The Stonewall Inn that I just loved. Having grown up as a theater kid, being in a piano bar in New York City has always been fun. I became a regular there, and befriended the manager, a man named Kurt Kelly, who has since become like a brother to me.

I had walked into the Stonewall Inn before, in the 90s. At the time, I knew a bit about the significance, but the site wasn't being treated with any historic reverence. Then, in 2006, Kurt and I heard that the Inn was shutting down.

We realized we had a chance to preserve history for our community. So, along with two other partners, we bought the Stonewall Inn. I had to go into credit card debt to do that, but this was a once-in-a-lifetime opportunity.

I haven't made much, but it's not about the money

My background is in marketing, and by that point, I had become a vocal advocate for the LGBTQ+ community. I knew I could help make the inn a success and raise its profile. Still, the first year was really difficult. We had a roof collapse and needed to put a lot of work into the building.

I made my investment back within the first couple of years, but I've never made much money from the bar. We're very transparent about that. Our rent is $55,000 a month. That's a lot of vodka soda to sell.

For me, it's never been about the money. That wasn't the point. I see myself and my co-owners as stewards of this place. When we purchased it, there was nothing about the history of the Stonewall Inn displayed. Today, there are historic artifacts, including the original "raided property" sign from 1969. Upstairs, we have a community center where we host everything from fundraisers to weddings.

We're honoring the legacy and continuing to take action

Owning the Stonewall Inn has been the responsibility of a lifetime. It's not just about keeping the lights on; it's about keeping the mission alive.

My co-owners and I believe that queer history can't be preserved without providing for queer futures. In 2017, we started a nonprofit, the Stonewall Inn Gives Back Initiative. We provide safe-space training to other establishments, and also provide support to the LGBTQ+ folks in the places where it's most difficult to be queer, like Mississippi, Uganda, or Kansas, where I grew up.

The nonprofit has a small budget of between $60,000 to $120,000 a year. Still, it's something my co-owners and I are really proud of. If we rely on our legacy, without continuing to take action, it just becomes branding. That's why we're determined to not just honor the Inn's past but to also have a real impact on the future of the LGBTQ+ community.

• In 2023, I graduated into a volatile job market, but thankfully, I landed a job.
• I was living in New York, with an inordinately high cost of living, which made staying untenable.
• Moving to Texas, with its much lower cost of living, allowed me to succeed.

After graduating with a bachelor's in computer science in 2023, a software company offered me an exciting job that paid $60,000 a year.

The catch? I had to move away from home.

I had grown up on Long Island all my life, but the company didn't have an office within commuting distance of my parents' house. Moving felt daunting. Moving across the country? Even more so.

But I felt like I had no choice because of the difficult job market and the rising costs in New York, so I packed up and moved to Texas.

The East Coast was nearly impossible to afford

I did the math. The average rent for an apartment in most East Coast states is $2,000 to $3,000 a month.

Over the course of a year, on average, that would be $30,000. This was half of my annual income — before accounting for any other expenses.

New York State income taxes are also high, plus there's federal tax on top. Already, with back-of-the-napkin math, I found that I would be left with less than half of my annual salary before accounting for food, insurance premiums, utilities, and rainy-day savings.

After all that, there would be next to nothing left for student loan repayments, and I wouldn't be able to save any money to eventually buy a house.

Texas was the much cheaper option

Researching my options, I learned the company had an office in San Antonio. As I researched this unfamiliar city, what I found astounded me.

Even in a large city like San Antonio, rent averages $1,000 to $1,500 a month. Texas also has no state income tax.

I would have significantly more of my annual income to spend and save if I lived in Texas with the same job.

I decided to move across the country to Texas

Though the numbers were promising, I had never been south of Virginia until my move. I had no clue what San Antonio was like and had no family or friends there for support.

I found my apartment in this new, unfamiliar city remotely. I scanned Google Maps. I made a list of apartments with ideal locations and read their tenants' reviews. I focused on ones with two to four stars to avoid being misled.

As part of my research, I looked at crime statistics. I was happy to see it was very low. I then narrowed my commute down to five minutes.

I'm financially comfortable in Texas

After the move, I paid about $1,250 a month for a 700-square-foot, one-bedroom apartment with an in-home washer & dryer, community gym, and pool.

There is a rule in personal finance called the 50/30/20 rule. Ideally, you should spend 50% on needs, 30% on wants, and save 20% of what you earn. Living in Texas, I easily spent less than 50% on needs and saved more than 40% of what I earned.

All of that would not have been possible on the East Coast at my entry-level, new-grad salary.

Lastly, home prices in Texas are much lower, so my goal of homeownership finally felt achievable.

I made my cross-country move work for me

As a new graduate, I faced a market with low salary expectations, frequent mass layoffs, and high job volatility.

I made it work by moving away from a state with a high cost of living to one offering a 50% discount on life.

New graduates and early professionals may find success doing the same.

• Higgsfield AI made a sci-fi action thriller called "Hell Grind" starring AI actors.
• The movie cost around $500,000 to produce.
• I went to a screening to see how it held up.

For a brief moment toward the midpoint of the AI-generated film "Hell Grind," I caught myself experiencing something unexpected: genuine emotion.

As the male lead, Roco, gazed at a photo of his recently kidnapped love interest, he flashed back to memories of them growing up together in an orphanage. The sadness and yearning felt real.

The sensation didn't last.

Mid-flashback, Roco and his AI-generated costars began laughing in an eerily synchronized fashion, their eyes peeled wide open. As I sat in New York's Metro Private Cinema this week, scooping up handfuls of popcorn, the uncanny valley of AI came roaring back.

Generative AI has crept into a variety of corners of the entertainment business this year, spooking many creatives who worry what it could mean for their jobs. While post-production teams are turning to the technology for de-aging and other effects, some actors in short dramas are already losing out on roles to AI characters. The shift is a top concern for the actors' union SAG-AFTRA, which approved new contract language this week that pushes producers to bargain over the use of synthetic performers.

"Hell Grind," which takes AI usage to the max, sprang up in May at the Marché du Film in Cannes (a side event that's not the famous Cannes Film Festival). The brainchild of startup Higgsfield AI — which runs an AI platform for creatives, brands, and marketers — it was conceived as a way to show the tech's potential as more than just a tool for making short videos. The company, which crossed a $1 billion valuation earlier this year, spent around $500,000 to produce its 95-minute film, with much of its budget going to computing costs. While AI regularly shows up in bits and pieces of Hollywood productions, "Hell Grind" is the highest-profile film made entirely with AI-generated visuals.

Higgsfield tapped a group of in-house creatives and outside filmmakers who used highly specific text prompts (typically around 3,000 words) to generate around 100 hours of content, which was edited down. The company did not use AI to write the script, except for a few short filler moments, which Higgsfield's CEO, Alex Mashrabov, told me he thought were noticeably less effective in the film.

The result is a visually impressive movie with a passable plot line, landing somewhere between a video game and an effects-heavy project like "Planet of the Apes."

"It's a new workflow, and it's also very important for us so that we show to the world what's possible," Mashrabov told viewers at the screening this week. "The production process looks different where it's actually possible to go back and iterate with AI and deliver exactly the emotion which the creative director was envisioning."

The company is releasing portions of the film on YouTube and plans to open source its workflow, production process, and prompts in the coming weeks.

At various points during "Hell Grind," I was taken out of the story when a character did something that just felt … off. The way Roco held a slice of pizza in one scene looked like it was his first time encountering the food, for example. The synthetic children in the movie generally creeped me out, and the AI-generated voice work didn't always feel consistent (one character seemed to flip between a British and American accent, for instance).

Still, it was hard to shake off the feeling that talented AI prompters may soon be coveted players in Hollywood.

While I wouldn't expect to see AI actors or writers playing a big role in the making of films like "Tár" or "One Battle After Another," it feels like this technology will be hard to resist for budget-sensitive executives angling to speed up movie production. That's especially true in genres like action and sci-fi, where visual effects budgets can be a big constraint. And the technology may open doors for independent filmmakers who have grand ideas but small budgets.

"Budgets and opportunities are not equally distributed across the world," Mashrabov said. "Hopefully, this will spark the next generation of creativity."

• I travel a lot but typically stay in luxury hotels.
• My sister recently asked me to go to an adult summer camp with her, and I was hesitant.
• However, I'm so glad I went, and it changed the way I think about "comfort."

I'm a luxury travel reviewer, so I've spent years refining my standards for comfort. I've stayed at extraordinary hotels and resorts around the world — properties with the plushest bedding and robes, private infinity pools, dedicated butlers, and absolutely no need to take care of myself while on property. Once you get used to that level of comfort, it's hard to un-know it.

So when my sister started trying to convince me to attend a women's retreat at an adult summer camp in Northern California, I was skeptical.

I grew up camping, but stopped doing it over the years

To be fair, I'm not anti-camp. I grew up going to summer camp and even did a fair amount of recreational camping with friends into adulthood. But then I had kids, a life stage that necessitated so much gear schlepping and cleanup that doing so for recreation ceased to appeal. Camping lost its novelty.

Meanwhile, my work as a lifestyle writer moved increasingly toward luxury travel coverage. Over time, I became accustomed to certain elite-level comforts — and, if I'm being honest, attached to them.

My sister asked me to go to an adult summer camp

My sister, whose tastes differ from mine in plenty of ways, recruited two of our closest friends from high school and college to attend, too. It felt like a strategic FOMO operation — and it worked. About a week before the retreat, I finally caved and booked my flight.

I expected rustic accommodations, communal bathrooms, and the general feeling of roughing it.

Instead, I walked into all sorts of surprises.

For one thing, the camp itself had been rebuilt in recent years and felt far more polished than I anticipated — and certainly much more elevated than the Southern California camp of my youth. Our cabin for the four of us had heating and air conditioning, an en-suite bathroom, ample charging ports, and was spotless. The food in the dining hall was genuinely great, including lots of vegetarian options for me.

It felt less like roughing it and more like a conference center situated among trees.

But the accommodations weren't the only type of comforts that surprised me.

The bigger surprise was realizing how many forms comfort can take that have nothing to do with luxury amenities.

I found comfort in community and rest

There were 175 women at the retreat, and many of them were older than we were. My group ranged from age 48 (me) to 51 (my sister), but many attendees were in their 60s, 70s, and even their upper 80s. There was something unexpectedly grounding about being surrounded by women carrying decades of perspective and experience. The atmosphere felt notably free of performance or pressure.

Then there was another luxury I'd almost forgotten: being an off-duty mom in an adults-only environment. My sister has three kids; my two friends and I each have two. For a few days, nobody needed snacks. Nobody needed a ride somewhere. Nobody was making an impassioned case for me to extend their screen time.

Instead, I had time for things I almost never make space for anymore. I tried to learn Mahjong. I made beaded bracelets and dipped my own candles. I dozed through a sound bath and tried forest bathing.

The activities themselves almost felt beside the point.

Luxury hotels are designed to create comfort. That's literally their purpose.

But somewhere along the way, I think I'd unconsciously narrowed my own definition of comfort into something highly curated and highly physical — softer sheets, nicer rooms, better amenities.

I left adult summer camp with the reminder that some of the greatest comforts have nothing to do with thread count at all.

• Facebook Marketplace sellers are using images of women to draw attention to items for sale.
• There's just one thing: The women aren't real. They're AI-generated.
• I talked to one seller who said the tactic got him a lot of views, but not necessarily more sales.

Let's say you've got a 2013 Jeep Wrangler you want to sell. It's a great car — low mileage, good condition, and a custom-lifted suspension. But there's a lot of Jeep Wranglers out there on Facebook Marketplace — how do you make your listing stand out?

For Rogelio Llamas, it was a little sex appeal that was missing. He added an image of a woman in a bikini top, denim shorts, and cowboy boots leaning on the hood of his Wrangler. Now there's a way to draw eyeballs. Just one thing: The woman wasn't real. Llamas generated her with AI.

Llamas, who's in Southern California, is part of a trend I've seen on Facebook Marketplace lately. He told me he got the idea from a YouTuber who makes videos about how to buy items at thrift stores and resell them for a profit.

On Reddit and social media, people have started to notice a strange new trend: scantily clad AI-generated women propped up against everything from cars to dump trucks to other items for sale.

In one listing for a motorcycle, a hot goth girl appears to be sitting on it. In another, three women in nearly identical outfits (yet slightly too tall) lounge across a 2010 Mercedes. In a listing for what appears to be a dilapidated hot tub, three young women in tank tops and short shorts sit atop the filthy plastic.

On X, someone found a listing for some kind of Caterpillar heavy machinery equipment — featuring a sexy woman in a bathing suit posing on the rusted metal. All had hallmarks of AI images — strange figures, slightly off sizes, and generally improbable looks.

Using attractive women to appeal to car or boat buyers isn't a new concept by any means. Sex sells! But the addition of AI-generated babes to Facebook Marketplace listings feels new.

For one thing, images on Facebook Marketplace typically look kind of crummy. The whole point is you're getting a listing of a real used item sold by a normal person, not a professional. As a frequent Marketplace buyer myself, I'm generally wary of any listing that looks too professional or whose photos are too good — to me, that's a sign the seller knows what they have and may be pricing it too high.

Llamas said that in the influencer video he watched, it suggested using a larger body size for the AI-generated woman rather than a slim one, because it creates a curiosity gap that makes someone want to click. (Who knows if that's the case?) The fact that it seems obviously AI is intentional. "It's supposed to be funny, but also be like, damn, is she real??" Llamas told me over Messenger.

The WTF-factor seems to be a trend. In one Marketplace listing someone posted on Reddit, a seller put an AI sumo wrestler standing on the drawers of a large toolbox, presumably to demonstrate the strength of the drawers and also to catch attention.

But the eye-catching tactic doesn't always translate to a sale. Llamas said that, indeed, he got way more views and clicks on his Jeep listing after adding the photo with the woman. Unfortunately, they're not all serious buyers. "They are messaging if she comes with the car, if she's real, or they think I'm her." He said. "I get negative messages like 'go to the gym' or 'you're fat,' very few have actually messaged me for the car itself."

The Jeep has been on the market for 19 weeks so far.

• Business Insider asked six tech workers which task they're saving the most time on with AI.
• Some workers said AI has turned tasks that once took hours into minutes.
• Others said the productivity gains haven't necessarily led to shorter workdays.

Ask a tech worker how AI has changed their jobs, and chances are they'll answer with a single number: hours saved.

In interviews with Business Insider, Big Tech software engineers, product managers, and data scientists described using AI to compress hours of work into minutes. They use it to draft documents, summarize months of meetings, review code, automate reports, and more.

Faster doesn't always mean easier, however. One Amazon data scientist said AI is adding hours to his workweek as he builds the automation systems that should eventually save him time. Another Amazon employee said any time saved is quickly redirected to the next project.

Here's how six tech workers said AI is saving them the most time. (Their responses have been edited for length and clarity.)

The time AI saves me gets reinvested into the next problem

Priyanka Devi Ramesh is a business intelligence engineer at Amazon. She's 30 and lives in Virginia.

Document writing is where AI has had the greatest impact. With the help of an AI tool called Pippin, it's become easy to translate my thoughts about the projects I'm working on into polished documents that can be technical or customer-facing. This saves a massive amount of time — I spend hardly 15 to 20 minutes max to write and finalize a document that would have previously taken me well over an hour.

On the technical side, I use Kiro and Amazon Quick. Kiro is great for brainstorming ideas and making logic updates in minutes. I'm building agents within Amazon Quick to automate common customer questions about dashboards and to surface insights from data.

AI hasn't reduced my work time. We're constantly looking for ways to clean up messy data and finding opportunities to automate wherever possible — so the time saved in one area gets reinvested into the next problem.

AI helps me make sense of months of meetings at Google

Prerit Pathak is a security engineer at Google. He's 27 and lives in New York City.

I use Gemini for a variety of purposes, but recently it has bolstered my note-taking.

I used to take shorthand notes during meetings to record interesting or important information. Now, I let Gemini take notes on my work calls, and the improvement has been incredible. A summarization task — such as understanding what happened over the previous six months — that once would have taken one to two hours now takes five to 10 minutes.

I'm working longer hours now, so AI can save me time later

Sarthak Gupta is a data scientist at Amazon. He's 29 and lives in Seattle.

AI has been most helpful with building end-to-end automation pipelines for recurring workflows.

It used to take 8 to 10 hours over a couple of days to create a monthly stakeholder report that involved pulling data, cleaning it, generating visualizations, and writing the summary. Now, an AI pipeline handles the data pulls, transformations, and dashboard refreshes. I spend maybe 45 minutes reviewing the output and adding context before sending it out.

However, my overall working hours right now are running longer than normal. The reason is that we're in the middle of an automation phase. Building the pipelines, integrating the AI tooling, validating outputs, and onboarding all of this into existing workflows is front-loaded work, and that upfront investment is real. The payoff comes later, when the same task that took a couple of days collapses into a button click.

So in the short term, AI is actually adding hours to my week, not subtracting them. I'd expect that to flip once the foundational pipelines are stable and the automation is doing the heavy lifting on its own.

AI helps me turn messy ideas into polished plans

Tanvi Pisal is a UX designer working as a contractor for Apple via Red Oak Technologies. She's 29 and lives in San Jose.

One of the biggest ways AI saves me time is in early-stage product thinking and documentation.

As a product designer, I used to spend hours drafting product requirement documents, brainstorming user stories, mapping edge cases, outlining use scenarios, and refining ideation before I even got to visual design.

Now, I can start with rough notes or a messy draft, and AI helps turn that into a much more structured document in minutes. What used to take me three to four hours can often be reduced to 30 minutes with feedback and refinements.

AI gets me to the starting line faster at Amazon

Udit Mehrotra is a head of product at Amazon. He's in his 30s and lives in Seattle.

Writing product documents is where I've seen the biggest change. Every major initiative at Amazon starts with a written document, and for years, the first hour or two of that process was building scaffolding: setting up the structure, filling in the sections you know by heart, and building something worth reacting to before you could get to the actual thinking.

Now I can use AI to input the customer problem and constraints and get a solid first draft in minutes. What surprises me is that it's often more comprehensive than what I'd have written on my own under time pressure.

Getting from 80% to 100% is still where the real work lives, and AI doesn't change that. The strategic judgment, the tradeoffs between what customers need and what's technically feasible, the decisions that require years of accumulated context about a specific customer problem — that thinking still takes the same depth and care it always did.

What has changed is that I arrive at the starting line faster, with a more complete structure to react to and push against. The quality of the final document is often better as a result, not because AI did the hard thinking, but because I spent more of my time on it.

What used to take a week can now take a day

Iren Azra Zou is a software engineer at the trucking logistics startup Double Nickel. She's in her 20s and lives in New Jersey.

I use AI, mostly Claude Code, for the majority of my coding. It's honestly hard to quantify the time savings; it feels like what used to take a week can now take a day.

We also rely heavily on AI to review and provide feedback on code, unless a change is particularly risky. That alone saves a huge amount of time. Instead of waiting days for human reviews, you get multiple rounds of feedback within hours. It also means I spend less time reviewing others' code, which probably saves me several hours each week.

There are tradeoffs — less human review can have downsides. But right now, the speed of iteration and innovation is incredibly valuable for us.

Do you have a story to share about how you're navigating a career crossroads? If so, please reach out to the reporter via email at jzinkula@businessinsider.com, or via Signal at jzinkula.29.

• Alexandra Frost is a former teacher who lives in Ohio and has five children.
• During each pregnancy, she faced logistical challenges due to maternity leave rules.
• Self-employment gave her more flexibility, but it blurred the lines between work and parental leave.

I was 38 weeks pregnant when I stopped being able to walk, at age 28, with my first child of five.

I remember the exact moment, standing in a long hallway, where I couldn't race back to my class where 30 high school kids sat waiting for instruction. I grabbed a rolling chair from a nearby classroom and inched my way back from the bathroom, sitting.

I'd developed a painful pelvic bone condition, and I thought for sure I'd be sent home to bed for the rest of my pregnancy.

But that's not what happened next. Instead, I got a call from HR, detailing my options. I could stop working now — since I couldn't walk and all — but that would count as starting maternity leave early. And that would mean two fewer weeks I'd get to spend with my baby.

So I rolled from student to student in that same chair for the next three weeks, until I delivered my baby overdue.

This was the beginning of my abrupt education into the world of maternity leave, and how policies, procedures, and the workplace dictate what's best for you — not your body, your mind, or even your doctor.

Over the decade that followed, I'd go on to have four more babies, work for multiple employers, and experience multiple parental leave policies. Each one shaped the story of my pregnancy, birth, and motherhood in different ways — some that I valued, and some I'd like to forget.

Baby 1: Toughing out the last weeks of pregnancy for a longer leave

Data from around that same time showed a growing trend of moms working right up until birth, a fear I had with my first child — would my water literally break at a student's feet? It's also why, in education, many teachers try to strategically conceive their babies to line up with school breaks.

In 2014, I learned on leave from my first baby that it was the first of many decisions I'd make as a new mom that involved choosing between my own health and well-being or my child's, who benefited from having me home longer after birth. Ultimately, I was glad to have prolonged the start of my maternity leave as long as I could to get the most healing time possible before heading back to work.

Baby 2: Arbitrary leave rules with big impact

Around 18 short months later, I was back in the delivery room in 2016, and navigating leave with another school district. This one had a unique rule that didn't quite make sense to me — if you had banked 12 weeks of sick leave, you could use all 12 for maternity leave, but only six of those could be paid. As a young working mother now with two babies, also married to an educator, this meant going six weeks without pay to get the most time off with my new baby, while trying to pay for our $4,000 hospital bill and double the diapers.

I called HR multiple times to clarify. Clearly, I'd heard wrong that if I had the sick time that I'd saved up, I couldn't use it still for paid time off? Except I hadn't. Their justification was that they had to make sure we had enough "extra" sick time in our bank so that we wouldn't be in a bind if we or our kids got sick. And here I was thinking it was my decision when and how to use my own sick time.

It taught me that the system isn't really built for moms' or babies' needs; it's for the benefit and convenience of the business, corporations, and districts where we work.

Baby 3: Revolving a leave around benefits

My third child arrived within weeks of a job change in 2018. If I had the baby, due ironically on Labor Day, before the start of a new month, I'd have a certain set of leave benefits. If I had the baby after, I'd have a different set, including insurance with a deductible that would reset. The timing was bizarre.

In this birth, I made the decision to be induced early to reap the massive financial and leave benefits I'd accrued at my first job — I'd met my deductible and the birth would be free if the baby came in time. Induction before the body is ready can come with a slew of risks, I found out. It soon turned into a hellish 28-hour labor, with a failed induction that wouldn't progress and I couldn't turn back from.

I learned that I could try to play God and manipulate my circumstances for financial gain and convenience, but that the body and the baby don't follow your best laid plans. In another world, both employers would have had equally great benefits and leave, and the baby could have come when he was ready. I greatly regret how I handled this, and had to work to undo the trauma of this birth that I caused by trying to rush it.

Baby 4: How it was supposed to be

If you have enough babies, eventually, parental leave will go your way. That was the case with my fourth son, in 2021, when I encountered a largely "chill" contact at my employer who was determined to infuse as much flexibility as possible around the company's standard leave practices.

Late in the pregnancy, when my pelvic pain returned, I was able to take up to five regular sick days off consecutively at a time without them counting toward official leave. This meant I could work for a day, take five days, and repeat — which I did, a handful of times — making the end of pregnancy much less stressful and painful.

I learned from this leave that encountering a contact or boss who would allow the policies to stretch as far as possible to benefit the people who need it. Though real nationwide change would be better, this was a step in the right direction.

Baby 5: Self-employment…better, but worse

A few years into parenting four sons, I quit teaching to establish my own writing, content marketing, and strategy business. I was now my own boss — so the policies better be good, right? Turns out, it's not as easy to take leave as a business owner as I thought.

When it was time to have my fifth baby, I had clients on retainers and editors with deadlines. I had a subcontractor who was luckily loyal and helpful who helped me navigate this. But around a month in, even with the help of a few part time, remote assistants, the emails, projects, and missed opportunities were piling up. I tried to walk the line as carefully as possible to avoid missing opportunities for the sake of full-time bonding with my baby. In reality, this meant only five weeks truly off.

From there, the lines blurred between leave and flexible work. I'd sneak in some work at naptime to keep the bank accounts balanced. I'd work as I nursed a fussing toddler during witching hour in the evenings. I worried as a mom of five about the choice to take time off at the expense of our finances. But in the end, I was in control, which felt better.

From this leave, I learned that maybe I didn't need super long leaves; I just needed choice. I didn't regret going back to work "early" when it was my own decision, not being forced on me by an employer or policy.

Do you have a story to share about your career? Contact this editor, Debbie Strong, at dstrong@businessinsider.com.

• Serena Williams is returning to tennis at age 44, with her first pro match the week of June 8.
• Williams has been open about using a GLP-1 to lose weight, saying it helps her move better.
• Her comeback is great news for people who believe in peptides for longevity and performance.

The GOAT is bounding out of retirement.

Tennis great Serena Williams is back in the game, after openly endorsing GLP-1s for weight loss, and emphasizing how great her knees feel at her new, lower weight.

"I'm moving better on Ro," she said in a Super Bowl ad for Ro, a telehealth company that prescribes Ozempic, Wegovy, and Zepbound. (Williams' husband, Reddit cofounder Alexis Ohanian, sits on the board and is a major investor.)

In the commercial, Williams said she can move more easily and enjoy steadier blood sugar levels throughout the day while she trains. In general, she feels "healthier" on her injectable medication, which she's said helped her lose 34 pounds after the birth of her second child in 2023.

"After having two kids, I wasn't able to be at a weight that was healthy for me," Williams told the "Today" show when she first announced her paid partnership with Ro in 2025.

Her comeback is huge for tennis, of course — but also for the burgeoning peptide movement.

Yes, GLP-1s ("glucagon-like peptide-1") are peptides.

For the uninitiated, injectable peptides are hot stuff right now. They have become wildly popular among gym-goers, athletes, and bodybuilders looking to trim fat, control inflammation, and avoid injuries. Ultimately, they want to find an edge in their routine.

Peptides are critical signaling molecules our bodies use to build muscle, heal injuries, and control hormones. Gym bros' favorite peptides include BPC-157 (aka "the Wolverine shot") for recovery, ipamorelin CJC-1295 for lean muscle growth — and, of course, GLP-1s for weight loss.

To be clear, Williams isn't suggesting that GLP-1s should be used as performance-enhancing drugs. She is simply emblematic of a growing trend, from regular folks on up to competitive bodybuilders and elite athletes, who are using GLP-1s to stay nimble as they get older.

Her experience mirrors what many doctors are seeing in clinical practice: Their patients are recognizing GLP-1s as a health optimization tool — seeing that the fat reduction and anti-inflammatory benefits of these drugs go beyond treating diabetes and obesity. Research shows the medications can improve heart health, liver function, and sleep quality. And scientists are also probing whether these drugs could help with healthier aging and longevity.

"It's the most powerful drug we've ever seen for helping people lose body fat," exercise physiologist Pat Davidson, who is using an unapproved GLP-1 drug to help shred fat for bodybuilding, told Business Insider. "You are never putting that genie back in the bottle."

GLP-1s target dangerous belly fat

The trend isn't limited to high-powered sports stars.

In San Francisco, Dr. Nima Afshar, a concierge doctor at longevity-focused Private Medical, said he has "dozens" of elite clients who are using these drugs to remove dangerous visceral fat from their midsections and feel better in their bodies.

Visceral fat is stored deep in the belly, providing essential cushioning for vital organs such as the liver and kidneys. While some visceral fat is normal, too much can be a problem, as this fat is metabolically active, and can impact a person's risk of developing chronic conditions like heart disease and diabetes.

Increasingly, Afshar is initiating conversations with patients who he says are "not that overweight" but who he thinks could use these drugs to boost their longevity by driving down visceral fat stores and lowering inflammation across the body.

"I almost don't use the word weight," Afshar said. "Some people can carry visceral fat, but tolerate it well and have no metabolic effects — that's uncommon." For most people, extra "toxic" mid-section fat, which is not always visible, "can ultimately make you not feel quite as good."

Once the negative signaling from that extra visceral fat is gone, a whole chain of health benefits can ensue, he said.

Afshar uses multiple clinical measurements — including InBody scans, routine bloodwork, liver and kidney ultrasounds, and blood pressure readings — to assess whether GLP-1s could be prescribed to improve a patient's health.

At the same time, he recommends all his patients on GLP-1s up their protein intake to "the maximum" recommended dose, and incorporate more movement into their daily routines, to help safeguard their musculature and prioritize fat loss over muscle wasting as they eat less food.

Some private insurers are getting wise to the same idea and mandating that patients adhere to some kind of exercise and nutrition program in order to get access to these medications.

Dr. Mitch Biermann, an obesity medicine physician at Scripps Health in San Diego, said the practice is emblematic of a wider shift in his field, toward a more holistic assessment of excess fat and body composition.

While insurance companies may not cover every indication (i.e., medical reason to take a drug), doctors are increasingly prescribing GLP-1s to a wider array of people with health concerns tied to carrying around excess weight, including joint pain, inflammation, and high blood pressure.

"I think there are quite a lot of indications that people can justifiably use the medicine," Biermann said. "There are just many different definitions of obesity now."

Bodybuilders and athletes are using peptides to get an edge

Whether it was steroids or insulin, bodybuilders have long used exogenous hormones to pursue bulgier muscles, along with protein-rich diets and more strength training than cardio.

GLP-1 drugs are essentially the next generation of that playbook: powerful new drugs that are like supercharged versions of our own hunger-checking hormones, which can help athletes get lean.

Take Davidson, the bodybuilder, who is gearing up for a couple of Mr. Universe-style bodybuilding competitions this July. He's aiming to cut his body fat, without sacrificing muscle.

So, alongside his ultra-high-protein, low-carb diet, he started taking an ultra-powerful but not-yet-released GLP-1 drug called retatrutide, which is still in development at Eli Lilly, about three months ago. (He's part of a groundswell of gym-goers tapping into underground "peptide" markets selling research materials.)

Davidson said he has lost over 30 pounds in three months. He feels like the GLP-1 has helped him maintain more strength than he usually does in the slim-down phase before a big event.

"I really haven't gotten any weaker," Davidson said.

Afshar said the "super optimizers" like Davidson are rarities in his practice, but he knows at least a few people who fit into the category.

Doctors vehemently recommend against doing this without medical supervision.

Williams is not part of this performance enhancement and fitness-optimization-through-peptides band of GLP-1 users; she is promoting these drugs for FDA-approved uses, including blood sugar control and clinical weight loss.

Still, her big comeback to the court next week is great news for the pro-peptide guys, who are keen to show that peptides are much more than drugs to treat chronic diseases like obesity and type 2 diabetes.

• Private student-loan collectors penalized for claims of misleading behavior could work with borrowers again.
• It's part of Trump's transfer of defaulted student loans from the Education Department to the Treasury.
• It could expose borrowers to high collection fees and repayment challenges.

Private companies penalized for their student-loan collection tactics may be making a comeback.

As President Donald Trump transfers federal student loans from the Department of Education to the Treasury Department, defaulted borrowers will be routed through the Treasury's "Cross-Servicing program," which uses private contractors to collect federal debts. Two agencies in that system, Pioneer Credit Recovery and Transworld Systems, were previously sued or fined by federal watchdogs for "misleading" or "abusive" practices.

Lawmakers and administration officials in Trump's first term pushed to terminate contracts with private collectors over high costs and accusations of predatory behavior. Former President Joe Biden ended their contracts in 2021. Now, with student-loan defaults at a record high, education policy experts say bringing private collectors back could expose borrowers to higher collection fees, confusion, and greater risk of falling back into default.

More than 10 million student-loan borrowers are in default or delinquency, Department of Education data shows. Involuntary collections, which include wage garnishment and federal benefits seizure, have been paused since January while the department prepares for major repayment changes. The department has not specified when the pause will lift, and did not comment in time for publication on the extent to which Pioneer and Transworld would be involved in collections once they resume.

"No reasonable person would expect that these companies are going to be doing what they're supposed to be doing and going to be effectuating borrowers' rights," said Bonnie Latreille, a former official in the Education Department's Federal Student Aid office.

The Trump administration says that the Treasury is best equipped to manage collections. Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent said in a March press release that the agency has "the unique experience, the operational capability, and the financial expertise to bring long overdue financial discipline to the program and be better stewards of taxpayer dollars."

A troubled student-loan collection history

The Consumer Financial Protection Bureau, which began supervising private collectors in 2013, found that they made various misrepresentations to defaulted borrowers, such as implying they'd be sued when that wasn't certain, and pushing more expensive repayment pathways.

Lawmakers later said private collection agencies "receive more than ten times as much" money for steering borrowers into their preferred repayment option, despite high redefault rates. "The Department is rewarding these agencies for behaviors that work in opposition to the prospect of student borrower success," they said.

In 2017, the CFPB sued Pioneer for engaging in "deceptive" and "abusive" practices and violating consumer protection laws, including by steering borrowers into costly forbearances instead of more favorable income-driven repayment plans. The court ordered the company in 2024 to pay $100 million to affected borrowers. Also that year, CFPB fined Transworld $2.5 million for filing debt collection lawsuits without proof that the debt was owed.

Transworld said at the time that it settled with the CFPB to avoid costly litigation. Navient, which oversaw Pioneer, denied any wrongdoing.

Because the Treasury already uses these companies to collect other payments, like taxes, using them is "the most straightforward way" to resume collections on defaulted student loans, said Colleen Campbell, former executive director of Federal Student Aid's loan portfolio management office under Biden. Simplicity for the administration doesn't necessarily mean clarity for borrowers.

"It just gets a little bit more complicated when there are more entities and agencies involved in what happens with the borrower," Campbell said.

Collecting on defaulted student loans requires specific knowledge of student-loan borrowers and policy, said Sara Partridge, the associate director of higher education at the left-leaning think tank the Center for American Progress. There's no evidence the Treasury has the necessary expertise to oversee these agencies, she said.

With private collectors returning, borrowers could face high collection fees, a harder time getting complaints resolved, and potential redefault, higher education policy experts said.

Campbell added that private companies were previously criticized for their variable fee structures. For example, the conservative think tank American Enterprise Institute said in a 2018 report that "harsher penalties are imposed on borrowers who quickly repay their loans in full after defaulting than on those who engage in a lengthy, bureaucratic 'rehabilitation' process but make no progress in paying down their debts."

Another concern is potentially poor coordination between agencies as the transfer happens, Campbell said.

"What you don't want is for somebody to go through all of the steps of getting out of default, only to have them feeling like they're lost in the process yet again because of the handoffs that have to happen between vendors," Campbell said.

Partridge added that the shift could make it harder for borrowers to get repayment help because two agencies would be responsible for managing accounts.

The Department of Education did not specify a timeline for the transfer to the Treasury, which will begin with defaulted borrowers before expanding to the broader federal loan portfolio. Undersecretary Nicholas Kent said during a fireside chat in April that it's "undeniable" that the Treasury is well-equipped to manage federal student loans.

"We want to make sure that we're developing best practices, along with our Treasury colleagues, to be able to service that debt in a much more effective way than we ever have," Kent said.

• Mori Nishimura, 34, grew up in New Zealand and moved to Japan at 16.
• After graduation, he began his career at real estate companies in Tokyo.
• Last year, he started his own company, which provides nature-based stays in mobile cabins in Japan.

This as-told-to essay is based on a conversation with Mori Nishimura, 34, the CEO of A Cabin Company in Japan. It's been edited for length and clarity.

I felt lost growing up. As a kid in New Zealand, I never questioned where I belonged. But as I got older, I became more aware of how different I was from my peers, which sparked my curiosity about Japan and my father's decision to leave it behind.

My father moved our family to Auckland because he wanted us to grow up surrounded by nature and away from the pressures of city life in Japan.

There weren't many Japanese families around, and I often felt caught between two cultures.

At 16, I moved to Japan by myself and enrolled in a boarding school in Kyoto. Life there was the opposite of New Zealand: Suddenly, I had curfews instead of the freedom to roam.

For the first time, I wasn't the odd one out. Two-thirds of the students were returnees — kids who had grown up abroad and come back to Japan — and they understood.

Exploring the countryside

Later, at university, I started exploring Japan. In the morning, before school started, I'd often drive out to different places and go surfing. I became fascinated with the Japanese countryside.

It reminded me of my childhood in New Zealand, when I used to escape into the woods near our house and build huts.

After graduating in 2015, I felt lost again and considered returning to New Zealand. Instead, I stayed in Tokyo and worked in real estate. A few years later, I started posting on LinkedIn about Japan's real estate market, the countryside, hospitality, and other interests. Eventually, I decided to strike out on my own.

During the pandemic, I traveled through rural Japan and reflected on what I wanted next. I came across a US company building tiny cabins on trailer chassis and saw an opportunity in Japan: fully operational accommodations that could bypass building permits and zoning laws because they were legally classified as vehicles.

I adapted the concept.

Starting a company from scratch

In 2024, I shared the idea on LinkedIn and wasn't targeting investors. Over time, though, the posts began attracting people who wanted to be part of what I was building.

A year later, when I launched a pre-seed fundraiser, investors reached out to back the business. My two full-time employees also found me through LinkedIn — the platform became an unexpected way to build both a team and a network of supporters.

The money raised from the fundraiser was used to open the first cabin in a national park in Chiba — about a two-hour train ride from central Tokyo — in August that year.

The 16-square-meter cabin is made from Japanese sugi and hinoki cedar and centered around a large picture window overlooking nature. Guests get complimentary firewood, coffee, and tea, plus bikes for rides to a nearby supermarket. It reached full occupancy within three months and has stayed booked ever since.

My second cabin opened in May, and my third will open in September.

Since the cabins are built on trailers, they are legally classified as vehicles rather than buildings.

Running a startup in Japan has been challenging because the ecosystem is still relatively new compared to those in other countries. There aren't many venture capital firms, so there aren't a lot of funding options.

The cabin costs about 30,000 Japanese yen for two guests, or about $190, a night.

So far, around 70% of our guests have been women. That came as a surprise, as I thought we'd get more solo male travelers, but we haven't had any.

Living up to my name

I didn't tell my parents when I started the business; they probably would have stopped me. When they found out, they were surprised but supportive.

My father was my biggest inspiration. About five years ago, he moved back to Japan and started looking for affordable land in the countryside where he could build a small cabin himself. But after being diagnosed with a terminal illness, he never got to see it completed. That experience gave me an even stronger sense of purpose in building the company.

He also gave me the name "Mori," which simply means "forest" in Japanese. It felt like I was born to do this.

Rebuilding my relationship with nature

My company focuses on nature, but I don't get to go out as much these days, except when I bring in guests. I work every day of the week.

Resting in Tokyo or any other big city is different because you never really switch off. I like doing campfires and having barbecues when I have the chance.

I want to enjoy my own cabin, but I can't because it's booked out.

• Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelenskyy wants to partner with Silicon Valley.
• Zelenskyy said the tech hub's AI skills and Ukraine's wartime drone experience could be "powerful."
• Ukraine has built a drone arsenal that's captivated the world as it fights Russia's invasion.

Ukraine has experience fighting and defending itself using drones. American tech companies have AI firepower. Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelenskyy says the combination of the two could be world-changing.

"American technological companies have a lot of different interesting AI technologies that we don't have. And we have a lot of things that they don't have because of our experience on the battlefield," Zelenskyy said on CBS News' "Face the Nation" on Sunday. "I think this cooperation can be huge and the most powerful in the world."

Ukraine, out of necessity, has built an arsenal of drone tech and anti-drone tech on a shoestring budget, captivating the global defense industry as it's largely held the line — despite its underdog status — since Russia launched its full-scale invasion over four years ago.

Ukraine said three types of homegrown drones allowed it to strike in the vicinity of Moscow earlier this month, and that it had developed a fixed-wing mid-range attack drone that's helped it strike in areas Russia once deemed safe. It's learned valuable lessons in the process, like the need for drone units to always be on the move and for their command centers to be buried underground to protect them.

The AI craze in the United States, meanwhile, coupled with a Defense Department eager to develop new autonomous military technology, is fueling the growth of a Silicon Valley defense tech industry. Companies like Anduril, led by Palmer Luckey, who built the Oculus virtual reality headset that Facebook bought in 2014, have raised billions to develop new uncrewed weapons systems.

Ukraine has since become an important potential proving ground for some of that new hardware.

Through a state-backed "Test in Ukraine" program launched last year, hundreds of international companies have applied to test drones, counter-drone systems, AI, electronic warfare tools, naval drones, and ground robots in Ukraine.

Zelenskyy on Sunday said he wants to deepen this symbiotic relationship further, and soon. His message to Silicon Valley: Stop talking and start building.

"We need to negotiate already," Zelenskyy said Sunday. "Not to speak about it. Just to take steps and to do it as quick as possible."

• Apollo's chief economist said there's "zero evidence of AI-related job losses."
• A parade of tech leaders celebrated that take over the weekend.
• At least a dozen major companies, meanwhile, have cited AI in their decision to lay off workers this year.

Anyone worried that AI will replace them should take a deep breath, at least according to Apollo Global Management's chief economist.

In a blog post on Friday, Torsten Sløk said there is "zero evidence of job losses because of AI," citing the ADP National Employment Report. Instead, he said, companies are hiring candidates who have AI skills.

"Many firms are hiring AI implementation experts, and the data center buildout is putting upward pressure on salaries for AI experts and on prices of semiconductors, equipment, and energy," Sløk said. "The bottom line is that the AI spending boom is stoking both employment and inflation."

Sløk echoed that sentiment in an April blog post, writing that "cheaper inputs don't shrink industries. Instead, AI is going to increase both productivity and employment."

The latest ADP report found that private companies added almost 110,000 more people to their payrolls in April.

Anxiety that AI will eradicate the average job is everywhere, stoked in part by those behind the technology. While Anthropic CEO Dario Amodei and OpenAI CEO Sam Altman have recently changed their tune as they gear up for their respective IPOs, they have both warned for years that AI could upend entire job categories. Amodei famously said last year that AI could wipe out half of all entry-level white-collar jobs.

Sløk's analysis resonated with some figures in the AI industry, including Box CEO Aaron Levie, Dell CEO Michael Dell, and White House AI and Crypto Czar David Sacks, who all agreed with his view in X posts over the weekend. David Solomon, CEO of Goldman Sachs, also made a similar argument last week in a New York Times opinion piece.

An EY survey of 240 financial service CEOs, meanwhile, found that about 60% thought investing in AI would maintain or increase their staff head count in 2026.

These optimistic takes, however, seem to clash with recent reality. At least a dozen major companies have cited AI as a factor in staff layoffs this year. In February, Block CEO Jack Dorsey said the company was slashing its workforce from over 10,000 to under 6,000.

"We're already seeing that the intelligence tools we're creating and using, paired with smaller and flatter teams, are enabling a new way of working which fundamentally changes what it means to build and run a company," Dorsey said in a memo shared to X. "i had two options: cut gradually over months or years as this shift plays out, or be honest about where we are and act on it now."

Cisco, Atlassian, Cloudflare, Coinbase, IBM, and Snap are also among the companies that have cited AI as a reason for layoffs.

Nvidia CEO Jensen Huang, one of the pillars of the AI industry, has criticized companies that blame AI for layoffs. "I think the narrative that connects AI to job loss for many of the CEOs that are doing it is just too lazy," Huang told a media outlet in Singapore last week.

Altman has called the practice of blaming AI to reduce staff "AI washing."

In his blog post on Friday, Sløk said that, in his view, the current employment climate is an example of the "Jevons paradox," an economic theory that says as new technology increases the efficiency of a resource, the more that resource is consumed.

In this case, that resource would be human workers.

"It is Jevons paradox playing out in real time: cheaper technology is creating more demand and more jobs," Sløk wrote.

• Erin Vlack was 280 pounds overweight and resolved to get in shape and change her lifestyle.
• She took things further when she moved from North Carolina to Spain to be closer to her son.
• The single mom told Business Insider that she is much happier and healthier after the switch.

This story is based on an interview with Erin Vlack, 48, a pharmaceutical supply chain consultant living in Valencia, Spain. It has been edited for length and clarity.

In April last year, two months after leaving my steady job in pharmaceuticals, I was in discussion with another company about a full-time position.

It was tempting to accept the senior directorship they offered, but I dismissed the idea at the last minute.

My 25-year-old son, Gavin, was studying medicine in Spain, and I missed him so much. "What if I moved to Europe to be with him?" I asked myself.

I spoke to immigration lawyers

I reached out to immigration lawyers that very afternoon. I'm a great believer in striking when the iron is hot, before excuses creep in.

Now, just over 12 months later, I'm renting a three-bedroom house less than 20 minutes away from Gavin in Valencia, the happiest and healthiest I've ever been.

Still, I'm no stranger to reinvention. A decade ago, at 5ft 5in, I weighed 430 pounds — 280 pounds overweight for my height — and wore size 28 clothing. I struggled to catch my breath when I did anything active, like taking my kid to the park.

Both my parents died within a year of each other, and I binged and comfort ate out of grief. I was a single mom, and there were financial issues that left me unable to afford fresh food all the time.

I'd buy things from Walmart and the Dollar Store, which weren't very healthy. Before long, I looked in the mirror and thought, "Oh my God, what have you done to your body?"

I had a mastectomy

The shock was enough to make me follow the Keto diet and start exercising. I lost 172 pounds before having gastric bypass surgery in 2022, which helped me get down to 140 pounds and size six jeans.

In 2024, I had a bilateral mastectomy and reconstruction because breast cancer runs in both sides of my family.

But the biggest change by far was selling my home near Raleigh, North Carolina, donating my property to charity, and arriving at the airport in Madrid with three suitcases.

I quickly found my bearings and my house with Gavin's assistance. I traveled on a so-called "non-lucrative visa," which means you come to Spain with only your passive income and savings.

Now, I'm waiting to convert to a highly qualified, high-value immigrant status that will allow me to be a digital nomad.

I'm fluent in Spanish now

As soon as I get my new visa, I'll plow my energy into the clinical trials supply company I founded. It feels exciting to be working for myself.

I'm in it for the duration and plan to stay in Spain, where I'm fluent in the language, until I can apply for long-term residency. The only things I really miss about the US are my friends and my sports car.

It's great to be so close to Gavin again. Although he's busy with his studies, we make time for meals and hugs.

We recently returned from a weekend trip when we talked, cooked, and enjoyed a couple of glasses of wine.

Food here is healthy

Everything is easygoing here. You'll walk through a plaza where a group of kids is playing while parents enjoy a coffee and casually kick the ball back to them.

The produce is fresh, and people walk everywhere. I look after my health by going to the gym six times a week and doing yoga outside on my terrace.

Every morning, I wake to the magnificent views of the mountains near the city. I've never felt more content and settled in my life.

• Many of my favorite hair, skin, and hygiene products are from Trader Joe's and cost less than $10.
• I use Trader Joe's fluoride-free toothpaste and lemongrass-coconut body oil every day.
• The best Trader Joe's beauty products include Enrich moisturizing face lotion and hair oil.

I used to think I had to spend a lot on beauty products if I wanted quality, but Trader Joe's has completely changed my mind.

Typically, I stick to food when I shop at the grocery chain, but on one trip, a $6 hair oil caught my eye. Although I follow a tight budget, it felt like a great price, and I decided to try it.

I couldn't believe how much it seemed to improve the health of my hair after just one use.

After that, I became hooked on trying Trader Joe's hair, skin, and hygiene products. Fortunately, many of them are under $10.

There have been a few misses, but here are the ones I've loved enough to make part of my daily and weekly routines.

Trader Joe's hair oil is a key part of my morning routine.

Each morning, I massage a drop of this oil throughout my hair. It makes it look so shiny in between washes, rather than greasy.

The moisturizing mix of ingredients, including argan oil, moringa seed oil, chia seed oil, and vitamin E, has also been helping my hair recover from when I ironed it daily while I was teaching.

Speaking of ironing, the oil is also designed to help protect hair against heat damage up to 450°F.

Some beauty fans even say this is comparable to the popular Ouai hair oil that costs about $30 for 1.5 ounces. Meanwhile, a 1-ounce bottle of Trader Joe's costs $6.

The Enrich moisturizing face lotion doesn't break me out.

At just $4 for a 4-ounce bottle, I was skeptical about Trader Joe's Enrich face lotion.

However, I've lived in Florida my entire life and have never found a facial moisturizer with SPF that doesn't break me out — until this one.

In addition to SPF 15, the fragrance-free lotion also contains vitamins A, C, and E.

I've been using Enrich under my makeup in the morning, and since it's so inexpensive, I don't feel bad applying it to my arms as well for some extra TLC.

Trader Joe's lemongrass-coconut body oil doesn't leave me feeling greasy.

I've been on the hunt for the perfect body oil to apply after the shower when my skin is damp. This is the first one I've tried that leaves me feeling moisturized, not like a layer of grease is sitting on top of my skin.

It's made with lemongrass oil, virgin coconut oil, sweet almond oil, jojoba oil, and olive oil, and I appreciate the natural ingredients.

The scent feels cheery and uplifting, and many consider lemongrass oil to be a natural mosquito repellent. With summer around the corner, that's a real perk.

Best of all, Trader Joe's body oil feels super affordable at $4 for a 4.8-ounce bottle.

I use Trader Joe's bonding shampoo and conditioners for a salon-level wash.

This shampoo and conditioner duo from Trader Joe's leaves my hair feeling utterly healed from that aforementioned heat damage.

I wash my scalp first with a gentle dandruff shampoo, then shampoo and condition with Trader Joe's bonding set. This is a strategy my dermatologist told me to try — the medicated shampoo cleans my scalp, while the regular shampoo nourishes my hair.

This routine makes my hair feel and look like I got a salon wash and blowout when it's dry. It may be because these products contain ingredients like hydrolyzed keratin and silk, which can help strengthen hair and make it shine.

At $8 per 12-ounce bottle, this duo cost me $16 total, but the quality reminds me of the expensive salon sets I've bought from my hairdresser in the past.

Some shoppers even swear these are dupes for more expensive bonding shampoos, which can cost twice (or even three times) as much.

I've been using this $1 find as a luxurious hand soap.

I couldn't believe how luxurious Trader Joe's Next to Godliness oatmeal-and-honey vegetable soap feels when I wash my hands with it. After all, I paid only $1 for a 4-ounce bar.

Since I've started using this as a hand soap, I haven't had to use as much hand lotion — it's that moisturizing. I love the lather, too, but it's the scent that stole my heart. This soap smells like oatmeal-spiced cookies right from the oven.

If I ever see this on shelves again, I'm stocking up.

This Trader Joe's fluoride-free toothpaste feels like a treat that's good for my teeth.

I've been looking for an affordable fluoride-free toothpaste that leaves my mouth feeling just as clean as its fluoride counterparts for some time — and this one from Trader Joe's has been a winner for me.

The 6-ounce bottle of peppermint toothpaste costs $4, and I appreciate that it has calcium hydroxyapatite, which some studies suggest can help protect teeth from erosion, cavities, and decay.

My favorite part is that it tastes like York Peppermint Pattie filling, but leaves my teeth feeling clean all day long.

Keep reading Trader Joe's diaries to see what other must-haves shoppers have in their carts.

• Environmental activist Erin Brockovich has adopted a new cause: the impact of data centers.
• She said residents are especially angry about NDAs between developers and local leaders.
• That lack of transparency, she said, is fueling anger among residents who feel ignored.

Big Tech is expanding into communities across the country — and they aren't all that happy about it.

Many residents in cities and towns where tech companies are looking to build large data centers to power their AI products are mobilizing against them, concerned about a possible drain on water supplies, a surge in electricity costs, and a decline in their overall quality of life.

Now, legendary environmental activist Erin Brockovich, famously played by Julia Roberts in the 2000 film about her work, has joined the fight.

Brockovich said on a recent episode of "The Jim Acosta Show" that communities are angry because they feel shut out of the decisions being made in their own backyards — and that the projects are being "shoved down their throat in secrecy."

Brockovich said that residents learn about projects in the proposal stage, only to find that local officials are limited in what they can say because of nondisclosure agreements. In other cases, she said, projects are presented as warehouses rather than data centers.

"There's a lot of secrecy and NDAs at a very proposal stage," Brockovich said.

That lack of transparency, she said, is fueling anger among residents who believe their concerns are being ignored.

High-profile data center projects have faced backlash in recent months. A massive data center project in Utah backed by "Shark Tank" investor Kevin O'Leary has sparked statewide opposition, for example, leading Utah Gov. Spencer Cox to unveil a new "framework" for data center development on Friday that addresses many of the community's concerns.

"Utahns deserve confidence that water resources, air quality, utility rates, wildlife, and quality of life will be protected. This framework helps ensure that data center development aligns with Utah's long-term interests and reflects Utah values," Cox wrote in an X post.

Microsoft, which once relied on NDAs in the early stages of data center development, said earlier this year that it would stop requesting them after local opposition.

"We've made the decision that being transparent with the communities where we operate or seek to operate is paramount," the company said. "This shift is about strengthening public trust, enabling better dialogue, and ensuring that our growth is matched by meaningful engagement."

Microsoft has adopted its own framework for building data centers called the "Community-First AI Infrastructure Plan." It promises to pay for its own electricity, minimize water usage, and create local jobs, among other things.

Brockovich, who has spent decades working with communities on environmental fights, said residents are not opposed to hearing difficult information. What they object to, she said, is being excluded from the process.

"I've worked in communities for 30 years," she said. "They handle the truth."

• Lori Bufka, 64, cares for her aging mother in Arizona due to high assisted living costs.
• Bufka's mother lives in a nearby trailer, reducing care costs and enabling family support.
• Tech aids Bufka in remotely monitoring her mother, enhancing her caregiving abilities.

This as-told-to essay is based on a conversation with Lori Bufka, 64, who is caring for her mother with dementia in Arizona. Assisted living became too expensive for her mother, so Bufka moved her into a trailer next to their home, where her mother would have enough space and safety. This interview has been edited for length and clarity.

I was a college professor and retired from a community college in Florida. I raised two boys, both of whom are married, and I have five grandchildren. I had retired to do van life with my partner, who has been with me for seven years. I realized, though, that you can only do so much van life before you need a place to come home to. So we bought a tiny house in Arizona.

I'm an only child, and my mom was in assisted living in California. When she went into assisted living, her veteran benefits and Social Security were enough to cover the cost of her care. She was in assisted living for over seven years, and she had sold her house and had some savings. The rate kept going up and up, and it was draining her savings.

The cost was about $4,700 a month, and it was about to go up to $5,200, which was a couple of thousand dollars more than what she earned.

She's 88, and I wanted to keep her there as long as she could. When I got the notice that the rate was going up again, and that they were going to raise her quality of care cost because her dementia was getting worse, her savings were down to almost nothing. They said that she would be moved to a dementia unit with four other people, and I didn't want that to happen to her.

Additionally, as her dementia got worse, she would get so many scam calls. She was savvy her whole life and worked as a lead for a law firm and a real estate agent, but it came to a point where I had to turn off her phone.

It was cheaper to take care of Mom at home

My partner and I decided that we could probably take care of her. It would be a lot cheaper. We started making the moves to bring her here so that I could take care of her. I brought my mom in to live by us in November.

There wasn't going to be room for her and my partner, so I had to give her a little model home in the same trailer park. Hers is about 700 square feet and is about a minute's walk from me. There are a lot of older people here, and the owner keeps a good eye on everyone. I knew that she wasn't going to be with me, but she needed care as if she were.

The trailer was in the low five figures, and we bought it using two-thirds of her savings and one-third of my savings. The rent for the space a little over $500 monthly. It's so much cheaper this way because my partner and I split the caregiving. Her utility bills run about $200 monthly in the winter and $70 in the summer. Caring for her started to become a little much for me, but because we're in the mountains, there aren't many home health organizations here, and none take her insurance.

She went into hospice care, and we hired someone to come for a few hours a week. It was supposed to be $37 for two hours, but when I got the bill, they tacked on mileage, so it became $92. We figured it wasn't worth it, so now hospice volunteers visit every now and then, and hospice covers medically necessary appointments. We know we're probably going to take care of her until she dies, unless she gets to a point where I can't take care of her.

It was a huge change in our lifestyle

We haven't been traveling since November, and I haven't been away from her for more than three hours at a time. My mom is deaf, and it would've been challenging to deal with that from afar.

My mom is somewhat independent still. She can dress herself and go about her day. I wake up every morning and make sure she's still in bed, then I turn on her coffee maker. I bring her breakfast over and leave notes about what she should do, like how to use the microwave. I check on her every half hour until she finally gets up. I come over before lunch to give her pills, eat lunch with her, and then sit with her until the afternoon, when she watches TV by herself. She can't cook dinner, so my partner cooks all her meals, and we bring them over.

The trailer has a bedroom at the back, then a small bathroom, kitchen, and living room. The rooms are big enough for her to guide her walker through, and because of how narrow it is, it lessens the fall risk. They had an old-fashioned bathtub that you had to step over to get in, but the woman who owns the trailer park hired a guy to lower the height. We also had to install railings on the porch. The kitchen has an electric stove, which is great because a gas stove isn't good when someone has dementia, because they can accidentally light a fire.

Tech has helped me take care of her remotely

One of the biggest nightmares is that people with dementia can't work the TV and telephone. She got to the point where she could barely use the remote, and she would start pushing buttons and would not stop.

I had come across JubileeTV, a TV system that lets you change channels remotely. The price wasn't prohibitive for us. The Jubilee remote replaced the Roku remote and came with a cover, so the buttons she can actually press are limited to volume and channels. If I'm out at the store, I can use the telescope function to see what she's done with the TV and get it back to what she wants to watch.

I often call her, so it comes up on the TV, and she uses closed captioning so she can read what I'm saying. The app has an automatic connect function because my mom wouldn't be able to answer a call or find the buttons to do so. The communication function also allows my sons to call her, and her hospice nurses can do the same.

I have used the app's drop-in function to look in and see if she's OK. I use that in conjunction with Blink cameras to make sure she doesn't fall. Those have been important because my mom has fallen a lot since she moved here. I probably check on her three or four times during the night and frequently during the day. One time, she put Dawn dishwashing soap in her glass of water because she wanted to add flavor, so I've had to stop her from doing unsafe things a few times.

I also have smart plugs from Alexa that let her control her radiator heater and other electronics. She has a cheap laptop that I put the Google Live Transcribe app on.

Tech has helped me in so many ways, and seeing her age at home has been somewhat stress-relieving.

• Classic Ferraris have always been my passion. Now they're my retirement fund.
• The backlash to Ferrari's new EV, the Luce, shows how passionate its fans are.
• It has driven up the value of my classic Ferrari collection.

I love the Ferrari Luce. Not because I'm a Ferrari fan or want to buy one, but because it's made me richer.

Since the Luce was unveiled earlier this week, a storm has raged across the internet. It's clear there's no brand in the world that's as much a religion, and no product that's worshipped as passionately, as a Ferrari. Even, and especially, by people who'll never be able to afford one.

Why does that make me richer? Because classic Ferraris have become even more attractive and valuable. Classic Ferraris have always been my passion. Now they're becoming my retirement fund.

A love for the classics

I've been driving Ferraris for 25 years. As a child from a modest background, I bought my first Ferrari with my first severance pay. It was a fiery red Ferrari 328 GTB, and although the car was pretty mediocre, the whole thing seemed like an incredible adventure to me — the kid from a rough neighborhood — in a car with that prancing horse on the steering wheel.

Twenty-five years later, there are four black Ferraris in my garage, and there is hardly anything in my life — aside from my sons — that brings me such joy as these useless but magnificent sports cars. In their restless irrationality, they shake every cell of my otherwise rational and rigorous life.

Enzo Ferrari once said that with Ferrari, you're really just buying the engine — and getting the rest of the car for free. That has always been the brand's Archimedean point. And perhaps that is precisely what explains the confusion surrounding the new electric Ferrari Luce.

A dislike of the new

An electric car has, at first glance, nothing to do with the heroism of the old Lampredi or Colombo engines. It no longer possesses fascinating mechanics, no vibrating heart of metal. It rather resembles a digital device on wheels. The moral significance of modern mobility simply looks like the Luce. The heroization of mobility, on the other hand, looks like a Challenge Stradale, an F40, or a 250 GTO.

How much Ferrari is a brand close to people's hearts is evident in the fierce reactions of those who may never own one yet still feel a deep emotional connection to it. For them, it is not reality that is crumbling, but a myth. There are few brands worldwide that evoke such quasi-religious reactions.

Ferrari's concept has always been to translate the brutal and the raw into the most elegant and sophisticated aesthetics imaginable and bring them into the present. The Luce, on the other hand, employs a form of mimicry that borders on the childish.

In places, the car is reminiscent of a Flintstones car or those Playmobil vehicles with which children embark on their first imaginary highway rides through the sandbox. Of course, both CEO Benedetto Vigna and Chairman of the Supervisory Board John Elkann were likely aware of the potential for sacrilege inherent in such a design.

With Marc Newson and Jony Ive, Ferrari brought in two designers from the digital world. They didn't want to hide the electric innards behind nostalgic forms. On the contrary, they built, in a sense, an anti-Ferrari. The logo is no longer proudly displayed, but almost demonstratively embossed. A clever, almost philosophical punchline.

The Luce seems almost deliberately alien in places, almost like an object without geographical origin, without cultural memory. While older Ferraris looked as if they belonged on country roads around Lake Como or among the curves of southern French coastal roads, the Luce seems to come from the abstract space of the digital present — from a world that is everywhere and nowhere at the same time.

That "everywhere and nowhere" nature of digital space is coolly acknowledged and consistently implemented in this car. While the old entrepreneurs were still heroes of an analog industrial age — men who, even after work, would take breakneck drives in their Ferraris (and I still very much enjoy doing so) — today's digital founders and multimillionaires often define their worldview precisely in contrast to this old-school entrepreneurship. It is a car for emotionally detached intellectuals with no need for compensatory status symbols.

The memes about the Luce ultimately show one thing above all: How emotionally charged this brand remains to this day. Everyone loves Ferrari. The Luce seems to violate the realm of dreams and desires.

The value of the classics

Perhaps the Luce will go down in Ferrari history as its boldest gamble. Or perhaps as a spectacular dead end. The only certainty is this: Ferrari has decided to attempt this transformation not cautiously, but radically. And in that alone lies a remnant of that old Ferrari megalomania that has always made this brand so fascinating.

The Luce is, at the same time, a car of radical anti-distinction. Precisely because it looks like a Nissan, it makes itself small, almost inconspicuous — even though highly valuable technology is hidden beneath its exterior: a powertrain concept with over 1,000 horsepower, designed to accelerate the Luce to up to 310 km/h on the highway.

Who cares, though? Somebody recently called and offered me a lot of money for my black Testarossa. He saw the video of my triumphant ride the day after the Luce presentation.

"I don't sell," I replied. I never will. I'm the guardian angel of Enzo Ferrari's spirit.

Ulf Poschardt is the publisher of WELT, POLITICO Germany, and Business Insider Germany.

This story is courtesy of the Axel Springer Global Reporters Network, which harnesses the resources of the company's newsrooms to publish ambitious scoops, investigations, interviews, opinion pieces, and analysis. It allows journalists — including those from POLITICO, Business Insider, WELT, BILD, Onet and Fakt — to collaborate on major stories for an international audience of hundreds of millions across platforms.

• I booked an Infinite Veranda cabin on my Celebrity cruise and was surprised by how much I loved it.
• The polarizing design replaces a traditional balcony with more of a windowed "sunroom."
• Despite lacking a true outdoor space, the cabin's flexibility and privacy made it worth the price.